PA 2087 
.014 
Copy 1 






IB 



I 



H 



m 



I 



■ : 4: 



■I ' Hi 



■ 



Pv ^B I Bv^S 



ROSE 



THROUGH ENGLISH IDIOM 



LIBRARY OF CONGRESS. 



' She] >1 

, A ' -4 _ 

UNITE!) STATES OF AMERICA. 



I 





i 



1 



i 




. 



LATIN PROSE 

THROUGH ENGLISH IDIOM, 

"3&uleg anti Uxetcfee* 

ON 

LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

BY THE 
REV. EDWIN A. ABBOTT, D.D., 

HEAD MASTER OF THE CITY OF LONDON SCHOOL. 



WITH ADDITIONS BY 

E. R. HUMPHREYS, A.M., LL.D., 



BOSTON: 

JOHN ALLYN, PUBLISHER. 

1878. 



6«1 



^.V 



Copyright, 1876, 
By John Allyn 




Cambridge: 
Press of John Wilson &* Son. 



PREFATORY NOTE 



BY THE AMERICAN EDITOR. 



In using this excellent little Manual with my own 
pupils, I have felt the want of a series of simpler in- 
troductory exercises, illustrative of the " Rules and 
Reasons," and more especially of those applying to 
the prepositions ; and I have therefore prepared the 
additional exercises now inserted. I would suggest 
to teachers the advantage of carrying out the same 
plan to a much fuller extent while using this text- 
book. 

Much of the difficulty experienced by teachers in 
communicating, and by pupils in acquiring, a facility 
in Latin and Greek Composition would be removed, 
if the former would discard both the idea and the 
expression so constantly applied to the Greek and 
Roman tongues, — " the dead languages." Regard 
them, as what they are, and ever will be, so long as 
our English tongue survives, " living," and embody- 
ing the life-essence of all the best modern tongues, — 
teach them on the same common-sense, practical 
plans as you teach German, French, or Spanish, and 



iv PREFA TOR Y NO TE. 

the duty will become an easier one to the teacher, a 
pleasanter and more profitable one to the taught. 

From the long and successful experience I have 
had in teaching Latin and Greek composition, it will 
not, I trust, be deemed presumptuous in me to rec- 
ommend — as I did, several years ago, in the Intro- 
duction to my Livy — as one of the most valuable 
aids to acquiring correctness and ease of composi- 
tion, the frequent and close analysis and written 
translation of passages of Caesar, Cicero, and Livy, 
in Latin, and of Xenophon and Plato, in Greek, and 
then the requiring the pupil on the following day to 
turn back the translation thus made into Latin or 
Greek, not insisting on a word-for-word agreement 
with the original, but allowing new turnings to stand, 
if not wrong. This last plan I have ever found most 
encouraging to the pupil. 

While the " Scheme of Latin Pronunciation " is 
retained at the end of the volume, I feel it necessary 
to say that, beyond the Continental pronunciation of 
the vowels, which I have advocated and used for 
nearly twenty years, I dissent in theory — as do 
many scholars far more eminent than I — from many 
points in that " Scheme," and in the Syllabus, on 
which it is founded, — a syllabus which, to use the 
words of one of the professors who prepared it, " has 
fallen still-born in England." In practice, as a tutor 
for Harvard, I am almost of necessity led into its 



PRE FA TOR Y NO T£. v 

adoption, having to read with pupils who have been 
prepared on that system. I earnestly cherish the 
hope, however, that the Professors of Harvard, and 
other American Colleges, will yet reconsider this 
matter of Latin Pronunciation, and modify the rules 
laid down for the sounds of the consonants. 

E. R. H. 

293 Columbus Avenue, Boston, 
July 18, 1876. 



PREFACE TO FIRST EDITION. 



The title of this book, " Latin Prose through English 
Idioni" is not intended to be a meaningless antithesis. 
The Author's object is to prepare English students for 
the study and composition of Latin Prose, by calling 
their attention first to the peculiarities of English 
idiom, and then to the methods of representing the 
English in the corresponding Latin idiom. 

The first part consists of * Rules and Reasons.' 
The pupil is supposed to have gone through a 
course of Latin Grammar and Latin Exercises, and 
to be on the point of writing continuous Latin Prose ; 
and this part is intended to give a rapid summary of the 
Rules of Latin Syntax regarded from an English point 
of view. The differences between English and Latin 
are not only brought prominently forward, but also, 
as far as possible, explained. The pupil's attention 
is called to the points in which English is superior 
to Latin, to the use of a and the, to the abundance 
of Tenses, of Verbal Nouns, and of Compound Pre- 
positions, and, on the other hand, to the Latin supe- 
riority in Moods. Rules are not despised, and are 
frequently and prominently set forth ; but an attempt 



PREFACE 10 FIRST EDITION. vii 

is made to prepare the pupil for them by analysing 
the English language, and by explaining the force of 
many English words that were, until lately, seldom 
explained, e.g. that, than, of. 

A good deal of space has been given to the 
Prepositions. It is hoped that the Dictionary of 
Prepositions contained in Paragraph 41 may be found 
useful, not only in preventing a good many common 
blunders made by beginners in Latin Prose, but also 
in training pupils habitually to connect and explain 
the different meanings of Prepositions both English 
and Latin. This seems a very useful mental training. 

The Rules are condensed, collected, and numbered 
at the beginning of the book, for easy reference. 

One inconvenience arising from treating the subject 
generally from an English, but occasionally from a 
Latin, point of view, is this, that it is difficult to 
preserve any strictly logical order in the arrangement 
of the Rules. This would be a very serious defect 
in a book intended to serve the purpose of a Gram- 
mar ; but in a book of reference it may, I hope, be 
excused, provided that the Index at the beginning 
is found sufficient to guide any moderately careless 
boy to the explanation uid examples of each Rule. 

The Examples at the end are purposely unarranged, 
or rather are arranged with no other object than that, 
by the time the pupil may be supposed to have for- 
gotten a rule exemplified some six examples back, 
another exemplification may present itself to him 



viii PREFACE TO FIRST EDITION. 

when he is off his guard. Connected examples are 
very useful to illustrate, but very useless to test a 
pupil's knowledge. A pupil that knows he is " doing 
ut" may answer correctly enough ; but set the same 
boy on ut next day, when he is " doing quum" and 
his correctness will often be lamentably diminished. 

In order to serve as a better test, these Examples 
have not, as the Examples in the former part of the 
book have, the English peculiarities pointed out by 
small capitals. The pupil, covering the Latin with 
his hand, is intended to read off the English into Latin 
without any help or guidance whatever. 

The Exercises are arranged on a principle that I have 
adopted for many years, and that I may call the pitfall 
principle. Each Exercise contains a number of pits or 
traps. All traps that prove fatal are repeated in the 
following Exercise, in a disguised form. If the fatality 
continues, the traps are repeated, always masked in 
different expressions, until even the weakest pupil in the 
class gains experience enough to warn him of danger. 
An instance will explain what is meant. In the first 
exercise of the term, the teacher sets, perhaps, " The 
excellent Balbus answered in haste, ' I asked you to 
come to Rome, and you promised to do so,' &c." The 
bottom boy sends up, " Egregius Balbus respondit 
celeritate, rogavi te venire ad Romam et tu promi- 
sisti facere ita." The teacher points out the correct 
expression in each case : — (i) " Balbus, vir egregius n ; 
(2) "summa celeritate," or "celeriter"; (3) "' rogavi' 



PREFACE TO FIRST EDITION. W 

inquit" ; (4) "ut venires"; (5) " Romam," without 
"ad"; (6) " te id facturum esse." Then he sets 
something like the following (only carefully dispersing 
the different traps through different parts of the new 
exercise) : — " ' I am surprised/ said (3) the passionate 
(1) queen, 'that, though I repeatedly entreated you 
(4) to come with (2) speed to my assistance, you have 
made a foolish promise to remain at (5) Carthage.' " 
Here our five old pitfalls are re-introduced, and one 
or two, not worth now mentioning, are introduced for 
the first time. It is needless to say that the bottom 
boy will fall into the same pitfall four or five, or even, 
on the subject of Sequence of Tenses and Oratio 
Obliqua, ten times ; but at last even the dullest avoid 
some pitfalls, and are found to have been goaded or 
wearied into something approximating to thought. 

The Exercises are selected out of some hundreds 
dictated in the course of an experience of several 
years. The English will occasionally be found abrupt, 
disconnected, and, it need not be said, uninteresting. 
I hope, however, that the language will be found free 
from the worst fault of such exercises — the fault of 
blending English and Latin into a Latin-English 
mixture that is no language at all, and that serves to 
teach nothing. The Exercises are meant rather as 
specimens of the kind of teaching than as models. 
Each teacher will do well to dictate, or, still better 
(if he has time), to write, exercises of his own. But 
though apologies may be due for the execution, I 



x PREFACE TO FIRST EDIT/ON. 

believe the pitfall principle to be extremely useful 
and stimulating, and I think the practice of writing 
continuous Latin Prose in this way might be ad- 
vantageously taught much earlier than it is taught 
at present. Boys are wearied to death by years o'f 
"Exercises on Rules"; and the monotony of the 
exercise tends to suppress thought. 

Some of the Exercises consist of extracts from the 
Percy Anecdotes, modified for the purpose of exempli- 
fying the differences between Latin and English idiom. 
In almost all of them will be found constantly re- 
curring exemplifications of the more important rules 
of Latin Prose, e.g. the Sequeiice of Tenses, the use o 
1 ut ' for to, and, above all, the rules of Oratio Obliqua. 
To this last I attach great importance, for I am per- 
suaded that a boy cannot be taught to master Oratio 
Obliqua without having been at the same time taught, 
in some degree, to think. 

Although I fear that many pupils even in Sixth 
Forms might consult parts of this little book with 
advantage, yet it is not intended for them, and hardly 
touches on style. It does not, therefore, cover the 
same ground as Mr. Potts' "Hints towards Latin 
Prose Composition," from which many of my pupils 
have gained great help. 

The e Scheme of Latin Pronunciation,' at the end 
of the book, is based on the Syllabus recently issued 
by the Latin Professors of Cambridge and Oxford, at 
the repeated request of the Head Masters of Schools. 






PREFACE TO SECOND EDITION. 



The Alphabetical Index, the changes in the headings 
of the pages, the easier introductory exercises, and the 
Appendix on the connection of sentences, introduced 
into this Edition, will, it is hoped, materially increare 
the utility of the book. 

The knowledge that the First Edition had been 
prepared somewhat hurriedly for the press prevented 
me from acknowledging the kind help of several 
friends, whose names I was unwilling to connect with 
a possible responsibility for mistakes for which I alone 
was responsible. In issuing this corrected and revised 
Edition I feel bound to express my especial obligations 
to Mr. J. S. Phillpotts, one of the Assistant Masters of 
Rugby, for his general supervision of the work from 
the first, and in particular for the Appendix in this 
edition, which is abridged from a sketch drawn out. by 
him ; also to the Rev. J. H. Lupton, Sur-Master 
of St. Paul's School, and to Mr. Henry Lee-Warner, 
one of the Assistant Masters of Rugby, for several 
valuable suggestions and corrections. My acknow- 
ledgments would be incomplete without reference to 
the help given me, in the course of preparing this 
Edition, by Mr. H. J. Roby — help that increases my 
regret that the second volume of his Latin Grammar 
is still a hope deferred. 



CONTENTS. 



PAGH 

RULES* xiii 

RULES AND REASONS I — 106 

MISCELLANEOUS IDIOMS 107—130 

GRADUATED EXERCISES I3I — l6l 

SCHEME OF LATIN GENDERS ........ 162 

SCHEME OF LATIN PRONUNCIATION 1 63 

APPENDIX ON THE CONNECTION OF SENTENCES . 1 64 
ALPHABETICAL INDEX l66 



* These Rules will be found to serve the purpose of a detailed Index to 
pages x — 10& 



INDEX OF RULES. 



TTiese Rules are intended to be committed to memory, and are 
therefore expressed as tersely as possible, without attempt at 
illustration. For explanations and examples, the pupil is 
referred, by the figures in brackets, to the Paragraphs in the 
* Rules and Reasons' For instance Rule 92 si?nply states 
the Latin use of Verbs of fearing. For the explanation, the 
pupil is referred to Paragraph 49. 

The Index will also serve as a detailed Table of Contents to the 
4 Rules and Reasons.' 



i. There is a reason for every irregularity. (1) 

2. Latin-derived words in English can seldom be re- 
presented by their Latin originals. (2) 

3. Many English words, especially abstract Nouns, 
have no single corresponding words in Latin. (3, 3 a) 

4. The English Passive should often be rendered by the 
Latin Active. (4) 

5. Do not translate the redundant it nor that in 
'that of.' (5) 

6. l It is the duty' * must/ &c. are often rendered by the 
Latin Neuter Gerundive with Dative of the Person. (5) 

7. I have a book = est miM liber. (5) 



xiv LATIN PROSE. 

8. Latin Verbs taking the Dative in the Active must be 
used impersonally in the Passive, retaining the Dative, 
e.g. ' tibi a me indu^tm*.' (6) 

9. Quisquam and uiius are used in Negative and Com- 
parative Sentences, and in Interrogative Sentences that 
expect the answer ' no/ (7) 

10. Each returned to his tent = Ad suum quisque ta- 
bernaculum rediere. (7) 

n. Distinguish alter and alius, quis and uter. (7) 

12. Observe the different meanings of 'one.' (8) 

13. Avoid Pronouns and the repetition of Nouns, as far 
as possible, by using the same Subject or Object for 
different sentences. (9) 

14. Nostrum and vestrum are used partitively ; nostri 
and vestri in other cases. (10) 

14 * Se, not is nor ille, refers to the principal Subject 
(10 a) 

15. Use nulliuSj nullo, for neminis, nemine. (io) 

16. The English Passive Indicative Present, e.g. Ms 
caught, is ambiguous, and must be translated, according 
to the sense, by the Latin Present or Perfect, (n) 

1 7. The English Imperfect after while is often rendered 
by the Latin Present. (11) 

18. The English Pluperfect after ////, before, and after is 
often rendered by the Latin Perfect. (11) 

19. The English Present after whe7i, if as long as, 
unless, before, and after, is often to be rendered by the 
Latin Future. (11) 

20. Be careful in the use of the English Auxiliary 
Verbs. Remember that they are used Subjunctively as 
well as Indicatively, and that they often have their ori- 
ginal, as well as their Auxiliary, force. (12) 



INDEX OF RULES. xv 

21. ' I ought to, could, have do7te,' is, in Latin, 'debui, 
potui, facere.' (12) 

22. Do not fear = ne timueris } not, ne timeas. (12) 

23. Verbs of trusting ; pleasing, helping, hurting, yield- 
ing to, suiting, resisting, favouring, envying, being angry 
with, take the Dative. (13) 

24. I threaten you with death = minor tibi mortem. 

25. Adjectives similar in meaning to the Verbs in Rule 
23, and also Adjectives expressing likeness or unlikeness 
and proximity, take the Dative. (13) 

26. Verbs of fulness, want, &c. take the Ablative. (13) 

27. Pudet, poenitet, piget, miseret, tsedet take the 
Accusative of the Person feeling, and the. Genitive of that 
which causes the feeling. (13^) 

28. Write 'interest TuUi' but 'interest mea, tua, nos- 
tra, &c.' (13^) 

29. Misereor, obliviscor, and reminiscor take the 
Genitive. (13^) 

30. Fungor, fruor, utor, vescor, pascor, and potior 
take the Ablative. (13^) 

31. Doceo, celo, rogo, oro, and interrogo take two 
Accusatives. (14) 

32. So do moneo, admoneo, and hortor, when the 
Accusative of the thing is a neuter Pronoun. (14) 

33. Transduco and transporto take two Accusatives. 

(14) 

34 Verbs compounded of Prepositions, and implying 
motion, take the Dative- of the Indirect Object, if they are 
used metaphorically, e.g. 'princeps imp er atari milites 
detraxit.' (15) 



xvi LATIN PROSZ. 

35. If literally used, they require the repetition of the 
Preposition, e.g. i anulum de digito detraxit.' (15) 

36. He flung himself at Caesar's feet = Caesari se ad 
pedes projecit. (15) 

37. Verbs signifying preferring and the contrary take 
the Dative of the Indirect Object. (15) 

38. After a verb of motion to, names of towns and 
small islands are in the Accusative without a Preposition. 
So are domum, humum, and rus. (16) 

39. After a verb of motion from, the above-mentioned 
words are in the Ablative without a Preposition. (16) 

40. After a verb of rest in, the above-mentioned words 
are, if Singular, in a locative case ending in -i (but 
Roma-i is written Romse) : if Plural, in the Ablative. (16) 

41. Sum, do, duco, tribuo take a double Dative, e.g. 
' librum mini dono dedit.' (17) 

42. The brave Balbus = Balbus, vir fortissimus. (18) 

43. Two or more Adjectives are not attached to the 
same Noun without et or que. (19) 

44. This disgraceful calamity = hsec tarn fceda cala- 
mi tas. (19) 

45. The men in the ship = qui erant in navi. (20) 

46. The sooner, the better = quo citius, eo melius. (21) 

47. Distinguish between a meaning any, and a meaning 
% certain. (22) 

48. No poet = nemo poeta. (22) 

49. Every one of sttfleriorlearnmg ) _ _ ( doctissimus 
All the mosi learned men j "~ ) quisque. (22) 

50. Omnis means all and not every, in Prose. (22) 



INDEX OF RULES. xvU 

(a) 1,000 or ) __ ( (a) mille milites. 

' (b) 10,000 men j ~~ ( (b) decern millia militum, 

52. More learning = plus doctrinse. 

53. Participles are freely used as Adjectives in English, 
but not in Latin, e.g. i the despairing soldiers/ 'milites, 
jam desperantes/ but not ' desperantes milites.' (23) 

54. With and in, denoting manner, must not be trans- 
lated by the simple Ablative of a Noun unqualified by an 
Adjective, e.g. l in anger/ ' with fury' = iracunde, or 
N.B. summa iracundia. (24) 

55. Nunc refers to the Present, simply ; jam to the 
Present regarded with reference to the Past or Future. 

(25) 

56. More, when used with Verbs and meaning to a 
greater extent, is plus : wr^en used with Adjectives, and 
when meaning rather, it is magis. (26) 

57. Extension of time or space is expressed by the 
Accusative. (27) 

58. The Ablative denotes the time at which or within 
which anything is completed. (28) 

59. Definite price is expressed by the Ablative. (29) 

60. Tanti, quant i, pluris, minoris (but on the other 
hand, mag-no, parvo, piurimo, &c.) are used after Verbs 
of selling and buying. (29) 

61. Tanti, quanti, pluris, minoris, with magni, parvi, 
plurimi and minimi, and also nihili, are used after verbs 
of estimation, and after est, signifying it is worth. (29) 

62. Adjectives, as well as Verbs, denoting fulness and 
emptiness, are followed by the Genitive or Ablative. 
(30,3i) 

63. Some Participles that are used as Adjectives take 
an Ablative of the quasi- Instrument, e.g. 'contentus 
parvo.' (32) 

b 



x viii LA TIN PROSE. 

64. Dignixs and indigrrms take the Ablative. (32) 

65. Natus, satus, and ortus take the Ablative. (32) 

66. An English Preposition between two Nouns, if it 
denotes that the second is the Object of the first, is often 
expressed by the Latin Genitive, as ' militiae vacatio,' 
* exemption from service.' (33) 

67. Present Participles used as quasi-Ncuns, and some 
Adjectives in -ax, take the Genitive, e.g. ' patiens laboris,' 
' Capax imperii.' (34) 

68. An English Preposition denoting that a Noun is 
the Object of an Adjective is often rendered by the Geni- 
tive, as 'perfidise imperitus.' (35) 

69. Verbs of condemning, as well as of accusing and 
acquitting, take the Genitive of the charge. (36) 

70. Of preceding a Noun denoting a quality is rendered 
by combining an Adjective and Noun in the Genitive or 
Ablative. (37) 

71. It is the mai'k of, characteristic of, like, &c. are 
often expressed by the Genitive. (38) 

72. English Prepositions denoting rest must often be 
rendered by Latin Prepositions denoting motion, e.g. ' on 
our journey/ * ex itinere.' (39) 

73. Do not translate redundant of, e.g. 'the City of 
London.' (40) 

74. Of is often rendered in Latin by combining an Ad- 
jective or Participle with a Noun, e.g. i summus mons/ 
' the top of the mountain.' (40) 

The English Prepositions in Alphabetical order are 
arranged, with their Latin equivalents, on pages 31 — 57, 
(4i) 



INDEX OF RULES. xh 

75. By, denoting agency, requires a or ab before the 
Ablative. Page 57. 

76. In when expressing direction literally or metaphori- 
cally, is followed by the Accusative. Page 44. 

yy. Cum is an enclitic after me, te, nobis, vobis, quo, 
nuibus. Page 56. 

78. The measure of excess or defect is expressed by the 
Ablative, e.g. ' quinque pedibus major.' (42) 

Idioms involving Conjunctions and the Relative Pro* 
1102m, are arranged in Paragraphs 43 to 72. 

79. Thomas, John, and Henry = Thomas, Johannes, 
Henricus ; or Thomas et Johannes et Henncus. (44) 

80. Autem, enim, que, quidem, ve and vero, and 
generally igitur, cannot stand first in a sentence. (44 a) 

81. Sed corrects or denies: autem (8e) introduces some- 
thing not inconsistent with what has gone before : at 
introduces a clause abruptly. (44 a) 

82. ' And not/ ' and no one/ l and never/ ' if . . . not/ 
are neque, nee quisquam, neque unquam, nisi. (45) 

83. I say it is not true = Nego haec vera esse. (45) 

84. Do not say c ne quidem Balbus/ but 'ne Balbus 
quidem.' (45) 

85. * And he/ * now this/ &c. must often be rendered by 
qui, quod, &c. e.g. ' now when he heard this, 1 ' quae quum 
audivisset.' (46) 

86. ' He also said' = 'idem dixit.' (46) 

87. He burned and left the bridge = Pontem incensum 
deseruit. (47) 



an: LATIN PROSE. 

88. That introducing an Objective or Subjective clause 
is generally to be rendered by the Infinitive. (48) 

89. Avoid the ambiguity arising from the Double Accu- 
sative before and after an Infinitive, e.g. ' Aio te vEacida. 
Bomanos vincere posse.' (48) 

90. It seems that \ . . ^^^^^ 
There is no doubt that \ dishonest. 

5 Videtur honest us esse. 

( Haud dubium est quin honestus sit. (49) 

91. There is no doubt that he will be caught = Haud 
dubium est quin futurum sit ut capiatur. (49) 

92. I fear that he will come = Vereor (timeo &c.) ne 
veniat. I fear that he will not come = Vereor ut veniat. 

(49) 

93. I heard her sing = audivi illam canentem. (50) 

94. Whether, introducing a Subjective or Objective 
clause, is num or 6 utrum . ... an': introducing a con- 
dition, it is sive. (51) 

95. Where the Relative introduces a thought, and not a 
mere fact, it is followed by the Latin Subjunctive. (52) 

96. The Subjunctive generally follows 'sunt qui/ 'erant 
qui/ i.e. i there are, were, some (such) that. 1 (52) 

97. Qui takes the Subjunctive when introducing a state- 
ment made by some one distinct from the writer. (52) 

98. What in Dependent Interrogatives must be rendered 
by quid and followed by the Subjunctive. (53) 

99. When the qualifying an Antecedent implies great 
or many, quantus or quct should be used instead of the 
Relative, e.g. ' I perceived the kindness with which, &c. 
'intellexi quanta benevolentia me exciperet.' (53) 



INDEX OF RULES. xxi 

ioo. ' The most beautiful that] l all that J ' the men that J 
must not be translated literally in Latin. (54) 

100a. The Relative in Latin often precedes its Ante- 
cedent. 

101. There was no one ^|£ d ^tp P unish}= Nemo 
erat ^*= A^ret 



quern non puniret. (55) 

102. There was not one but hated him = Nemo eral 
quin ilium odisset. (55) 

103. The English Antecedent, when in apposition to a 
preceding sentence, is attracted into the Relative clause 
in Latin, e.g. l he lightened the taxes, an act that endeared 
him to the people/ * quo benencio gratus in vulgus factus 
est.' (56) 

104. Not a day passes that he does not come = Dies 
fere nullus quin homo ventitet. (57) 

105. Beware of the English omitted Relative with Par- 
ticiples, e.g. ' those remaining here/ 'qui hie manent. 

(58) 

106. Who would believe such a man as, or, a man like, 
Catiline ? = Quis Catilinae, homini impurissimo, credat ? 

(60) 

107. When two words are connected in the way of com- 
parison by quam, and when the Verb is the same for each 
member of the sentence of Comparison, the two words 
stand in the same case, e.g. ' Tullius melior est quam 
Balbus.' (61) 

108. Quam cannot be replaced by the Ablative of the 
second member of the comparison unless the first member 
of the comparison is in the Nominative or Accusative, e.g. 
1 donum dedit specie majus quam re/ not ' majus re.' (62) 

109. Take care not to use the Ablative instead of quam, 
where the Adjective does not qualify either member of 
the Comparison, e.g. ' he has a taller horse than I ' is not 



xxii LATIN PROSE. 

' Hie equum altiorem habet me/ but ' quam ego (habeo).' 

(63) 

no. * Sequence of Tenses? In subordinate sentences, 
the Tenses depend on the lenses of the principal sentence, 
the rule being 'Like follows like J e.g. l Do you know 
where he was? \ ' Scisne ubi fuerit ? ' (64) 

in. I do not know what I should have done = Nescio 
quid fac turns fuerim. (64) 

112. Quum with the Imperfect and Pluperfect generally 
takes the Subjunctive. (66) 

1 1 3. Fostquam takes the Perfect unless an interval is 
expressed or emphatically implied. (66) 

114. Antequam and priusquam, dum, donee and quoad 
are followed by the Subjunctive when design is implied, 
or when an action is referred to that has not actually 
commenced. (66) 

115. Not because it is honourable, but because it is use- 
ful = Non quod honestum sit, sed quia utile est. (68) 

116. 'Si' with the Past Tenses of the Subjunctive 
denotes an impossible, ' si ' with the Present Tenses 
a possible, condition. (69) 

117. You must never have different tenses of the Sub- 
junctive in the Protasis and Apodosis. (69) 

118. Quanquam generally takes the Indicative, quanwis 
the Subjunctive. (69) 

119. Quamvis is often used with an Adjective, without 
a Verb. (69) 

120. You will repent, when old = Senem te pcenitebit. 

(70) 

121. He is frivolous, if not immoral = Levis est, no 
dicam improbus. (70) 



INDEX OF RULES. xxiii 

122. Instead of ut non, ut nemo, ut nunquam, write 
ne, ne quis, ne quando, where purpose is denoted. (72) 

123. Utinam'with the Present Subjunctive introduces 
wishes that can be realized : with the Past Subjunctive, 
wishes that cannot. (72) 

i To,' differe?U uses of. (73) 

124. * To,' denoting purpose, must never be expressed 
by the Latin Infinitive. (73) 

125. I p7'07iiise, hope, to come = promitto, spero, me 
venturum esse. (73) 

126. I hope that it is so = spero rem ita se habere. (73) 

127. I happened to = accidit ut (ego) &c. (73) 

128. To, after Verbs of asking, commanding, advising, 
and striving must be rendered by ut with the Sub- 
junctive. Exceptions, jubeo, conor. (73) 

129. The English Present Participle, inasmuch as it 
often contains a concealed Conjunction, can seldom be 
rendered by the Latin Present Participle. (74) 

130. After ad and in use the Gerundive and not the 
Gerund, if the Verb takes an Accusative Object. (75) 

131. The Gerund or Gerundive is used after ad, de, in, 
inter, and ob, seldom after other Prepositions. (75) 

The English Prepositions tised with Verbals are ar^ 
ranged in A Iphabetical order in pages 93—96. ( 75 ) 

132. The Subject of the principal Verb often comes 
earlier in a Latin sentence than in English, so as to dis- 
pense with is and ille. (76) 

133. Use Parentheses to avoid Pronouns. (77) 



xxiv LA TIN PROSE. 

134. In Oratio Recta leave the introductory sentence 
unfinished, and place inquit (not dixit or respondit) after 
the first emphatic word of the speech. (78) 

135. In passing from Oratio Recta to Oratio Obliqua, 
(1) principal Verbs fall into the Infinitive Mood and their 
Subjects into the Accusative ; (2) the Tenses of the In- 
dicative are preserved in the Infinitive ; (3) where the 
Future Infinitive does not exist, the form fore ut is used ; 

(4) the Subjunctive in the Apodosis* of a Conditional 
sentence is rendered by the Future Participle with esse 
or fuisse. (78 a) 

136. In passing from Oratio Recta to Oratio Obliqua 

(5) Indicatives following si, qui and Conjunctions derived 
from qui, are changed into Imperfect or Pluperfect Sub- 
junctives ; (6) Imperatives become Imperfect Subjunctives ; 
(7) Questions in the Second Person are rendered by the 
Imperfect Subjunctive ; (8) Questions in the First or Third 
Person, by the Accusative and Infinitive ; (9) me will be- 
come se, hie will become illic, &c. (7^ b — e) 

137. To diminish the ambiguity arising from the use of 
he in English Oratio Obliqua, use ipse in Latin to shew 
the reference of se. (78/) 

138. In Oratio Obliqua the introductory sentence is 
often completed. (78 g) 

139. Metaphors cannot be literally translated from 
English into Latin. (79) 

140. Hyperbole cannot always be literally translated, 
e.g. I prefer a thousand deaths = malo sexcenties mori 
(80) 

* For the meaning of this word, see page 83. 



LATIN PROSE 

THROUGH ENGLISH IDIOM 



RULES AND REASONS. 

1. Irregularities. When we find an irregularity in 
Latin or in any other language — 'at Corinth/ ' Corinthi* 
— we ought to feel sure that there is some reason for it. 
Sometimes we can find a reason. For example, why is 
'at Carthage' i Carthagini/ * apparently, dative; and ' at 
Corinth ' ' Corinthi/ genitive ? The explanation is said 
to be that the -/ in Corinthi, Carthagini, Romai (-ee), 
domi is an old locative case. 

Sometimes we cannot find a reason. For example, why 
do the Latins say ' Nemini faveo/ but dislike to say ' Ne- 
minis misereor/ preferring ' nullius misereor'? No ex- 
planation, that I know of, has been given of this. But, 
whether we can find out a reason or not, we must always 
Dear in mind that : 

Rule — There is a reason for every irregu- 
larity. 

2. Latin-derived words. In almost all cases English 
words derived from Latin do not now mean the 

* The form in -e is also found. It has been suggested that the-i is used 
in familiar names, e.g. Cartkagini, but -e in others, e.g. Prseneste. 

B 



2 ABSTRACT NOUNS, [Par. 3. 

same as the Latin cognates, e.g. opp7'ess must not be ren- 
dered by opprimo, which means / crush or surprise. 

Rule — Do not* translate English words of 
Latin derivation by Latin cognates. 

Examples : secure, honest, office, occupy, obtain, observe, 
censure, person, station, family, inspiration, succeed, 
conspire, cease, probable, expect. 

3. Complex thoughts. It is natural that the language 
of a modern civilized nation should contain many more 
words expressing complex thoughts, than are found in 
the language of an ancient nation. Periphrases must be 
used to express such modern words in the ancient 
language, e.g. res novse for a revolution, res adversse for 
adversity. Some metaphors, e.g. striking in l a striking 
thought/ cannot be literally translated into Latin. See 
Paragraph 79. 

3a. Abstract Nouns may be rendered, (1) by peri- 
phrases, e.g. theory, prsecepta artis, quod in prseceptis 
?ositum est, (2) by Verbs, e.g. ' In pursuit of some 
.cherished object, they will undergo any hardship, and 
submit to any degradation] ' quidvis perpetiuntur, cuivis 
deserviunt, dum quod velint consequantur/ See Par. 40. 

Rule — Many English words represent 
complex thoughts for which there are no 
single words in Latin. 

4.. The emphatic subject. In English, if we wish to 
emphasize the Subject, e.g. John in 'John built this house/ 
we have to use redundant it, ' It was John that, 9 &c, or 
the Passive ' The house was built by] &c. In Latin the 
Subject can be emphasized by the order of the words, 
and therefore need not be emphasized by construction. 
Hence : — 

Rule — The English Passive should often 
be rendered by the Latin Active, Thus 

* That is, do not without verification or care. 



Par. 6.] THE ENGLISH PASSIVE, 3 

The soldiers were seized Milites cepit pavor 
with a panic 

5. The redundant * it.' To avoid an unemphatic ter- 
mination, e.g. i That the man committed suicide is said, 1 
(and perhaps to indicate the construction early in the 
sentence) the English insert a redundant it. The Latins 
never use this redundancy. 

It is said that the man com- Ferunt hominem ) rnort em 
mitted suicide Homo fertur j 

sibi conscivisse 

4 That 9 is often used for a previous Substantive to 
avoid repeating it before a Preposition, generally 'of,' e.g. 
\ I would rather abide by my judgment than by that of 
all the rest.' It is omitted in Latin. ' Meo judicio stare 
malo quam ( ) omnium reliquorum.' Sometimes the 
Substantive is repeated, ' quam judicio.' But never use 
is or ille to represent the English ' that ' ill ' that of.' 

Rule — Do not translate the redundant * it,' 
nor * that ' in ' that of.' 

Sentences stating a duty or necessity, e.g. 'it is the 
duty of Balbus to avoid this/ are often turned in Latin as 
follows : ' The avoiding of this is for Balbus/ ' Balbo hoc 
vitandum est.* From Intransitive verbs the Neuter of 
the Gerundive is used impersonally, e.g. 'all must die,' 
i omnibus est moriendum/ i.e. ' there is to be dying for all.' 

Rule — ' It is the duty/ ' must,' &c, are 
often rendered by the Neuter of the Latin 
Gerundive with the Dative of the person 
referred to. So ' I have ' = ' est mini.' 



6. The English Passive. If an Active Verb in English 
takes a Preposition between itself and its Objects, e.g. ' I 
trust to you/ we rarely venture to say in the Passive ' you 
are trusted to.' If the Preposition is to be kept, we must 

B 2 



4 PRONOUNS. [Par. % 

say * trust is given to you.' So, in Latin, where Verbs 
in the Active take the Dative of the Object, you must 
not place that Object as the Subject of the Passive Verb, 
but must retain the Dative and use the Verb impersonally ', 
e.g. * Tibi creditur/ ' there is trust given to you/ 

N.B. — Such verbs are very few, but some of them are 
/very common : persuadeo, noceo, credo, placeo, ignosco, 
faveo. 

Rule — Latin Verbs taking the Dative must 
be used impersonally in the Passive, retaining 
the Dative. 



7. Pronouns. The English anyo7ie is ambiguous. 
Distinguish between (i) quisquam* or ullus, (2) quilibet 
or quivis (which means anyone you like), and (3) aliquis 
{someone, any particular person). 

Anyone can boast that he is Cuilibet promptum est glo- 
more learned than ANY riari se doctiorem esse 

of his own pupils quam quemquam suo- 

rum discipulorum 

Rule — * Quisquam ' and ' ullus ' are used 
in negative and comparative sentences, and 
in interrogative sentences expecting ' no.' 

This is sometimes expressed thus : where all are excluded use Ullus or 
quisquam, where all are included use quivis or quilibet. 

The beginner must also distinguish between (1) alter the 
other (of two), and alius another; (2) uter ? which {of two) ? 
and quis or qui ? which ? And (3) between uterque 
each of two, and quisque each. 

* It ought to be unnecessary to warn the pupil against confounding quis- 
quam with quisque each, and quisquis whoever. But it may be use- 
ful to remind him of the position of quisque immediately after SUUS, the 
Verb being in the Plural, in such sentences as 'thev returned to their 
several tents,' 'Ad suum quisque tabernaculum rediere.' 



Par. 9.] PRONOUNS. 5 

8. One in the sense of people, we, a man, as in ' One sees 
every day,' &c, must be translated by nos, omnes, &c, 
or by the Impersonal Passive, e.g. i One ought not to 
fear,' 'non est timendum.' After if, use the Second 
Person (not inserting tu) or quis, e.g. ' If one does one's 
best,' ' Si agis or quis agit, pro vinous.' 

' One . . . another'' is ' alius . . . alius ' : ' the one . . . the 
other' is ' alter . . . alter.' 

One, unless used as a numeral meaning one and not mo7'e 
tha?i 07ie, is never to be translated by unus. The neglect 
of this rule is as faulty as the French-English use of one ; 
* I have one book ' for i I have a book.' 

Rule— Observe the different meanings of 
'one.' 

9. One, when referring to a preceding Substantive, 
must be left untranslated in Latin, or must be translated 
by repeating the Substantive, as in ' a small house is better 
than a large o?ie,' ( quam magna (domus).' Here the Ad- 
jective with its inflection renders the repetition of the Sub- 
stantive unnecessary. 

Avoid, wherever you can, the repetition of the Substan- 
tive represented by one. i I haven't a horse of my own, 
but my brother lends me one,' l Equum equidem non 
habeo ; frater autem mihi commodat.' 

9a. Pronouns are not so often used in Latin as in Eng- 
lish. The Latin Participle facilitates the omission of Pro- 
nouns, e.g. ' I saw my brother yesterday, and gave him a 
book,' i Fratri, viso heri, librum dedi.' The Latins also 
omit Pronominal Adjectives often where the context leaves 
little room for ambiguity, e.g. my is omitted in the last 
example, and so, i Tell your brother,' ' Die fratri.' The 
Latin use of inflections diminishes the ambiguity arising 
from such omissions. 

Rule — Avoid Pronouns, and the repetition 
of Nouns, as far as possible, by using the same 
Subject or Object for the different parts of 
the same sentence. See Paragraph 76. 



6 PRONOUNS. [Par. 10. 

10. Pronouns, anomalies in. 

The Latins have two words to denote its and you in the 
Genitive, one nostri, signifying us and you collectively, 
the other nostrum,- us and you distributively. Nostrl 
appears to be tlv Genitive of the Adjective noster used 
substantively. Nostri means i of our nature/ ' of our 
interests/ ' of our condition.' Nostrum is the true plural, 
and means simply ' of us/ l of our number.' Thus, ' none 
of us* is * nemo nostrum ' (partitive), but 'our mind is 
the best part of us, i.e. of our nature,' is ' nostri melior 
pers animus est.' Roughly speaking, we may say : 

Rule — ' Nostrum,' ' vestrum ' are used par- 
titively ; otherwise * nostri/ ■ vestri.' 

That this rule is not strictly true is seen from the fact that, when omnium 
precedes the Genitive of nos or VOS, it is necessary (not merely allowable) 
to have nostrum or vestrum, even used Possessively. ' Patria est 
communis omnium nostrum * parens.' The reason is that omnium 
brings into prominence the imtltitiidinoits or distributive side of nos. 

No satisfactory reason has been given, as yet, of: 

Rule — 'Nullius* and ' nullo ' are used in- 
stead of * neminis ' and ' nemine.' 

lOa. Him. In Early English, him often refers to the 
Subject, e.g. l he gat him home/ This is sometimes am- 
biguous, so we now add self ('same'), unless anothef 
Subject intervenes between ' him ' and the Subject to which 
'him* refers, e.g. 'he helped himself J but 'he said that 
Balbus helped hzmJ The Latins generally (but see 78 f.) 
use se to refer to the principal Subject, whether another 
Subject intervenes or not ; ' Dixit Balbum sibi subvenisse.' 

Rule — Se (not eum nor ilium) refers to the 
Principal Subject. 

11. English Tenses are superior to Latin in their variety. 
There is nothing in Latin to distinguish between / 
catch and / am catching ; between / caught, I have caught 

* Nostrum cannot be Genitive dependent on omnium. 



Par. II.] TENSES. 7 

and / have been catching. Sometimes *I am catchiii^ 
may be rendered * In eo sum ut capiam' or 'jam capio. } 
'/ have caught ten fish 1 may be sometimes rendered 
t decern pisces captos habeo ;' ' I have been for two days 
catching fish 1 ' biduum jam pisces capio.' On the other 
hand, the English Passive is ambiguous : — 

The catcher is CAUGHT Captus est captor 

You a?'e LOVED, / am Tu quidem amaris, mihi 
HATED autem invidetur 

Rule — The ambiguous Eng. Pres. Pass. 
form, eg. ' are built,' must be rendered, accor- 
ding to the sense, by the Latin Pres. or Perf. 

Note the following differences of idiom : 

While this was going on, Dum haec geruntur, hostes 
the enemy fled terga dederunt 

Rule — The English Incomplete Past (Im- 
perfect) after while is graphically rendered in 
Latin by the Present after ' dum.' 

I did Jiot let him go TILL he Hominem non ante di- 

HAD PROMISED to re- misi quam promisit se 

/rain from it for the ab his in posterum tem- 

fuiure peraturum esse 

After the fate of the war Postquam victoria consti- 
HAD been decided, he tuta est, Romas erat 

used often to live at Rome frequ ens 

Rule— The English Complete Past (Plu- 
perfect) when following the Conjunctions 
•Till/ ■ Before,' and ' After/ is often ren- 
dered by the Latin Perfect (Aorist). 

When a long interval is expressed or implied, postquam is sometimes 
followed by the Pluperfect. If quura is used, see Paragraph 66. 



8 AUXILIARY VERBS. |Var. 12. 

In saying if or whe7i 'he comes] instead of * shall or 
shall have come/ we speak idiomatically but incorrectly. 

The Latin is more correct than the English idiom. //, 
till recent times, was followed by the Subjunctive inflection 
in English, but this has died out. 

He will do it if he IS ABLE Faciet, si poterit 

/ will set out when day Quum illncescet, (better 
BREAKS illuxerit) proficiscar 

In dependent sentences there are other important dif- 
ferences in the use of Tenses : see Paragraph 64. 

Rule — The English Present Tense after 
* When,' < If,' < As long as/ < Unless/ is often 
to be rendered by the Latin Future. 

12. The Auxiliary Verbs in English require care in 
rendering them into Latin. 

For example, would is the past of will or wish : and ' he 
would do it, in spite of me/ means 'he wished' (Indica- 
tive). But ' he would do it, if you asked him/ means ' he 
would wish' (Subjunctive). So 'he could' may mean 
' he was able/ or ' he would be able.' Note the fol- 
lowing : — 

He may {possibly) come Fieri potest ut veniat 

You MAY come {if ' yoti like) Licet tibi venire 

He might help me if he Posset mini subvenire, 
WOULD modo si vellet 

He might have helped me y Potuit, sed noiuit, mihi 
but he would not subvenire 

He MIGHT rettirn at any Fieri potest ut quamvis 
moment subito redeat 

IVfOUUDpardonyouifyou Si modo tibi ipse snbveni- 
WOULD help yourself res, ego tibi ignoscerem 

{which you will not do)* 

* For rules about the Tenses of the Subjunctive, see Paragraph 69. 



Par. 12. j 



AUXILIARY VERBS. 



After breakfast he WOULD 
(used to) take a walk 

[I) Would that you knew! 

You SHOULD not do this 

Should you do this you 
WOULD commit a fault 
(which I am su7'e you 
will not do) * 

/ SHOULD {be inclined to) 
thinks say, d^c. 

He must hear me (nothing 
shall prevent if) 

He MUST have seen me 

I MUST have perished, if you 
had not helped me 

You must come by way of 
Rome (for there is 710 
other way) 

I MUST obey my father 

I must confess I was mis- 
taken 

You must know Pin at 
Rome 

You MUST not fancy you 
are envied 

Let him re- Ui) I beg you 
turn ((2) if he likes 



Pransus ambulabat 



scires ! 



Vellem 

Utinam 

Non de'oes hoc facere 

Tu, si hoc faceres, culpam 
admitteres 



Dixerim, crediderim, &C. 

Nihil obstabit quominus 

(orefficiamut)me audiat 

Non potuit me non videre 

Perieram,f nisi tu mihi sub- 
venisses 

Necesse est per Romam 
venias 

Oportet me patri parere 
Fatendnm est me erravisse 

Scito me Romse esse 

Noli pntare tibi invideri 

Permitte homini redire 
Redeat, si velit 



Rule — The Auxiliary Verbs in English 
being used in the Subjunctive as well as in 
the Indicative without change of inflection, 

* For rules about the Tenses o* the-Subjwnctive, see Paragraph 69. 
t Perieram = / had {assuredly) died: periissem is more regulai 
and common. 



IO PROHIBITIONS. [Par. 13. 

and having, sometimes, their original, as 
well as their auxiliary force, are full of am- 
biguities. 

/OUGHT (OWED) to \ HAVE Debui ) , 

/ COULD (WAS ABLE TO) ( DONE this Potui \ 

Rule — After 'I ought/ 'I could,' we use 
the Complete Present Infinitive to denote 
that the action is not fulfilled. The Latins 
use the Present Infinitive. 

The English do is now used in prohibitions* in order to 
surround the Negative as it were and annex it to the Verb, 
e.g. c Do not kill him/ The negative is here connected 
with the Verb more closely than in the older English 
' kill him not.' In expressing a prohibition, the Latins 
seem to have thought more of politeness than of directness. 
They did not like to say i do not kill/ nor even, as a rule 
'you will not kill/ but 'take care that \ou may be found 
hereafter not to have killed/ i Ne interfeceris.' 

Rule — In Latin prose a Prohibition is ex- 
pressed by ' ne ' with the Second Future^or 
by ' noli ' with the Infinitive, or ' cave ne ' 
with the Present Subjunctive. 

Ne with the Present Suojunctive is found in poetry, to signify prohibition. 

13. The English Object was once represented by a 
Dative, as well as an Accusative, Inflection. In i give 
him the book/ him is the Old English Dative. It would 
be a mistake to say that to is omitted before him. This 
Inflection is now lost in Nouns ; but after some Verbs its 
place is still occasionally supplied by the Preposition to, 
e.g. ' I trust (to) the man. 5 

Some Verbs and Adjectives, though not followed by Pre- 
positions in English, yet to a Latin ear indicated relation 
to, rather tha,7i immediate actio7i on, the Object, e.g. : 

* Perhaps also to P'eface the verb by an indication of prohibition or inter- 
rogation. ' Do not come ' expresses the prohibition earlier than ' come not,' 
and is less ambiguous than ' not come.' 

i In Deponents, use Perf. Subj. ' ne aspernatus sis.' 






Par. 13a.] THE OBJECT OF A VERB. II 

/ ENVY (LOOK ASKANCE Invideo tibi 
ON) you 

He is like (unto) his father Puer patri similis est 

Rule — Verbs of trusting, pleasing, helping, 
hurting, yielding to, suiting, resisting, favour- 
ing, envying, being angry with, take the 
Dative. 

Rule — Adjectives similar in meaning to 
the above, and also Adjectives expressing 
likeness or unlikeness, and proximity, also 
take the Dative. 

Instances are given in Grammars and in the examples at the end of the 
book. Some words signifying nearly the same thing take different cases 
owing to a slight difference of original meaning. Thus medeor meant 1 
am a remedy to, and therefore takes a Dative ; sano means / lyiakeliealthy, 
and therefore takes an Accusative. So noceo takes a Dative, leedo an 
Accusative ; impero / give orders to, a Dative, and jubeo / order, an 
Accusative followed by an Infinitive. 

Rule — Verbs signifying ' I abound in/ ' I 
am in need of,' ' I cease, or retire, from/ 
mostly take the Ablative: 

Examples : egeo, careo, abundo, vaco, desisto, cedo. 

Indigeo mostly takes the Genitive. See Paragraphs 30,31. 

13a. Old English Impersonal and Reflexive Verbs. 

Several English Verbs denoting feelings that, in old 
times, seemed to come inexplicably upon a man from 
without, e.g. pity, repent, were once used impersonally, 
e.g. ' it pitied them/ ' it repented him. ? In the same 
way : — 

Rule — Several Latin Verbs denoting feel- 
ings of the mind are used impersonally and 
govern the Genitive of the Object of the 
feeling, e.g. ' I repent (it repents me) of my anger] 
4 Pcenitet me iracundiae meae.' These verbs 
are pudet, pcenitet, piget, miseret, taedet. 



12 THE OBJECT OF A VERB. [Par. 14. 

Note the following : — 

Tt is my interest that Balbus, Mea interest Balbum, Tvil- 

it is the interest of Tul- lii interest te judicio 

- lius that you, should wi?i vincere 
the case 

Rule — ( Mea,' ' tua,' ( sua,' 'nostra,' ' ves- 
tra,' are used in the Feminine Ablative,* 
sometimes after ' interest,' and almost al- 
ways after ' refert,' to denote the person to 
whom a matter is of importance. ■ Interest ' 
takes the Genitive of names. 

Some Verbs denoting feelings were once reflexive in 
English., e.g. 'he bethought him of. ? So in Latin misereor, 
I pity (me of) ; obliviscor, I forget (me of} ; reminiscor, 
I bethink, O.E. remember (myself of), take a Genitive of 
the object. 

He pities us Miseretur nostri 

Recordor, / bear in mind, always, and meminl sometimes (when 
meaning / keep in memory and not / think of), takes the Accusative. 

Several other Transitive English Verbs, / enjoy (enjoy 
myself with), discharge (busy myself with), eat (feed 
myself with), I master (make myself powerful with)., are 
represented in Latin by Deponent Verbs governing the 
Ablative. 

Rule — ' Fungor,' * fruor,' « utor,' < vescor/ 
'pascor,' ' potior,' f take the Ablative. 

14. The indirect Object in English is preceded, after 
all but a very few Verbs, by a Preposition. Give, ask, tell, 
teach, shew, &c. are exceptions, e.g. 'give (to) (see page 

* 'The origin of this singular construction is unknown. Perhaps the 
Pronominal Adjective has a kind of Adverbial signification, in my direction 
{in relation to me).' — Madvig. It has been suggested that the original con- 
struction was '■ re(m)fert Tullii, mea(m),' ' inter (rem) Tullxi, mea(m) est,' 
abridged to the present form. 

t Potior, like potens, sometimes takes the Genitive. 






Par. 15.] THE INDIRECT OBJECT , 3 

10) me the book/ In Latin (where the cases do much of 
the work of the English Prepositions) the indirect Object 
is denoted by its case. 

He was keeping his father Patrem facinus celabat 
in ignorance of the deed 

Rule — ' Doceo,' ' celo/ ' rogo, , ' interrogo,' 
and ' oro,' are followed by the Accusative 
of the person, as the Direct Object, and also 
by the Accusative of the thing taught, con- 
cealed, &c. as the Indirect Object. 

N.B.— Neuter Pronouns and Adjectives approximate to 
Adverbs, and are therefore used more freely than Mascu- 
line Pronouns and Adjectives. Note : 

/ advise you to do this Hoc te moneo 

Rule — * Moneo,' ' admoneo/ and 'hortor/ 
take an Accusative of the Person and an 
Accusative of the thing, if the latter is a 
Neuter Pronoun. 



In Elizabethan English, banish was used with an Indirect Object governed 
by an implied Preposition, ' I banish you (from) the realm.' Much more 
naturally could the Latins use the Indirect Object in the Accusative after the 
expressed Preposition in trans cmco, 'milites Rhenum transduco.' 



15. Verbs implying motion. The case of the Indirect 

Object in Latin will be further considered under the 
head of Prepositions. But a few general rules may be 
laid down about Latin Verbs containing Prepositions 
and conveying a notion of motion to, or motio7i from. 
Such Verbs, e.g. detrano, can be used metaphorically or 
literally. If we say 'princeps detrahit milites ? we do not 
mean that the emperor literally himself draws away the 
soldiers ; but in i detrahit anulum f the Verb is literally 
used. Literal motion must be more emphatically expressed. 



14 OBJECT AFTER VERBS OF MOTION, [Par. 16. 

Princeps detraxit \ mili i tes imperatori 

( anulum de digito suo 

Rule-— Verbs containing Prepositions, and 
conveying a notion of motion to or from, 
take the Dative of the Indirect Object when 
not literally used. 

N.B.— If literally used, they require the Preposition to 
be repeated for emphasis, as above, detraxit de.* 

Examples :— Afferre, admovere, auferre, circumdare, 
circumjicere, detrahere, deripere, eripere, extorquere, 
imponere, imprimere, incurrere, inesse, inferre, injicere, 
objicere, offerre, opponere, prseficere, subjicere, subjun- 
gere, supponere, subtrabere. 

Rule— Verbs signifying < preferring ' and the 
contrary take the Dative of the Indirect 
Object, or repeat the Preposition before the 
Indirect Object. 

Examples : — Anteferre, anteponere, prseferre, prae- 
ponere, postbabere, postponere. 

16. The Object after Verbs of Motion. The Object after 
a Verb of Motion to in English sometimes dispenses 
with a Preposition. ■ He went home,' ' Fm going (Early 
English oii> then c? or a-) fishing' Where the Prepo- 
sition is not quite dispensed with, the tendency is some- 
times seen, as in ' He rides a-fieldJ All Nouns that are 
often repeated after the same Preposition in English have 
a tendency to become Adverbs. Thus we say ' a-bed/ but 
not 'a-chair'; 'a-foot, ; but not (now) 'a-knee'; 'a-sleep/ 
but not * a-slumber.' Now the Romans thought more of 
towns, and less of countries, than we do. Farmers used 
at one time to live in the towns and go out to their work. 
So as they were continually goi?ig into and out of their 

* The Dative in ' Caesari ad pedes se projecit * is perhaps partly Po&- 
, partly Dative of the Indirect Object. 



Par. 17.] TOWNS AND ISLANDS. 15 

homes , their fields ', and their towns, but not so often into 
ana out of countries, they omitted Prepositions before 
towns but retained them before countries. Small islands 
are naturally regarded as mere towns. 

Rule — After a verb of 'motion to,' the 
names of towns and small islands are used 
in the Accusative without Prepositions, as 
also are 8 domum,' s humum/ and ' rus.' 

Are you going a-field to- Visne rus hodie ire ? 

day? 

Rule — After a verb of ' motion from/ the 
names of towns and small islands are used 
in the Ablative without Prepositions. So are 
' domo,' ' rure,' ' humo.' 

We shall set out FROM Garthagine proficiscemur 
Carthage 

Rule — After a verb of ' rest in/ the names 
of towns and small islands, if singular, are 
in a locative case ending in -ae (which was 
once -ai)"or -i ; if plural, in the Ablative: 
Romae, Corinthi, Carthagini (sometimes written 
Carthagine) Athenis. 

The same rule holds for domi, ruri, humi. 

The fact that domi and Corinthi are not real Genitives, explains some 
seeming anomalies. 

You may write ' domi mese/ which is one notion, and ' domi Cice- 
ronis ' j but not domi with an ordinary Adjective ; ' in an excellent home ' 
is ' in domo optima.' 

Urbs and oppidiraij when in apposition to names in the locative case 
of the Genitive form, are placed in the Ablative, and generally (not always) 
preceded by in. ' He lived in the once pofitcloiis city of Antioch.' 'An- 
tiochise, (in) celebri quondam urbe vitam agebat.' 

17. ; Is ' used relatively. The word i is,' in English, 
sometimes means ' is relatively.' The Latins distinguish 



16 • THE: [Par. 1 8, 

between ' is ' in ' the child is (in the place of) a conso- 
lation ' and i the child is (actually and absolutely) a boy.' 
In the former case they use a Dative (Representative 
Dative or Dative of Design) after est. ' Puer est mini 
solacio,' f Do hoc tibi muneri.'* 

The same construction is found after one or two Latin 
words of giving and esteeming 

Rule — Sum, do, duco (I esteem), tribuo, 
take a double Dative. 

This Dative, having the force of an Adjective, must not be coupled to any 
Adjective but one of Quantity. 'Est roihi magno (not caro) solacio.' 
Maguo gives a Superlative force to the Quasi-Adjective solacio. 

18. The Attribute. The unfortunate absence of our 
articles the and a compels the Latins to resort to all sorts 
of substitutes in the use of Adjectives. Thus they cannot 
translate ' the foolish f Tullia ; by i Tullia stulta,' for that 
might, and indeed would, mean * Tullia is foolish,' or 
1 foolish Tullia ' (where foolish would be a kind of name 
like our ' Simple Susan/ or like the Latin 'Africanus 
Minor/ ' Pompeius Magnus.') Consequently they have to 
find some equivalent for the denning Article. They 
define, by mentioning jirst the individual, and secondly 
the class with the attribute, ' Tullia, mulier stultissima.' 

Rule — The Adjective (after 'the') quali- 
fying the name of an individual in English, 
often qualifies the name of the class in Latin. 

THE TIMID dove Columba, animal timidissi - 

mum 

THE % BRAVE officer Centurio, vir fortissimurr. 

19. The English use of two Adjectives. In English 
we often use two or more Adjectives, unconnected by 
Conjunctions, as epithets to a Noun, e.g. ' a good, brave. 

* Compare ' I have a king here to my flatterer.' — Richard II. 

t * Foclisli' here sometimes = 'owing to her folly.' See p. 165, IV, 

t \XL&! bet/ween, the Adjective and the Noun, sometimes = the. 



Par. 20.] THE: 17 

man.' In Latin, owing partly to the absence of Articles, 
and partly perhaps to the allowable omission of est, i vir 
bonus fortis' is inadmissible.* It might mean ' a good 
man is brave.' The Latins therefore insert a Conjunc- 
tion, * vir bonus fortisque.' In the same way the Latins 
do not insert ordinary Adjectives between hie, and the 
Noun qualified by hie. If any Adjective is inserted, it 
is generally tot or t ant us, or some Adjective modified 
by tam. Perhaps the reason is that these Adjectives, 
being of a demonstrative nature, coalesce more easily 
with hie. 

Do not desert me in THIS Ne me in hac tanta (or tam 
SAD calamity tristi) calamitate dese- 

rueris 

Rule — Two or more Adjectives, whether 
pronominal or otherwise, are not attached to 
the same Noun without * et ' or < que.' 

N.B. — Ille often comes between an Adjective and its 
Noun, ' magnus iUe vir/ ' vir me sapientissimus.' 

20. ' The J denning a phrase. When a Noun is pre- 
ceded by ' the ' or ' a ' and followed by a Prepositional 
phrase, the English must not be rendered literally in 
Latin. ' Homines in navi clamabant ' could not con- 
vey the meaning ' the men in the ship shouted/ but 
might mean ' men, or the men, shouted z;z the ship: We 
must supply the Relative. But ' homines qui erant in 
navi' might mean 'men that were in.' It will therefore 
be better to put some Relative word Jirst, and to say ' as 
many men as were in the ship shouted/ i.e. i Quot, or qui 
erant in navi/ or ' Quidquid hominum erat in navi.' 

Very often the ambiguity can be removed by the inser- 
tion of a Participle or Adjective. Thus, 'praslium ad 
Cannas multa miliia hominum absumpsit/ might mean 
' the battle destroyed many thousands of human beings in 

* Where an Adjective and a Noun form one notion, e& navis Oneraria, 
another Adjective, e.g. maxima, may bt added, 

c 



18 « THE: [Par. 21. 

the neighbourhood of Cannae/ but in { pradium ad Cannas 
comtnissum' the t ad Cannas' is shown to be connected 
with commissum, by coming between the Participle and 
the Noun qualified by the Participle.* 

Another way of removing the ambiguity is to change 
the Prepositional phrase into an Adjective, prseiium Can- 
nense. 

Rule — Prepositional phrases,where a Rela- 
tive is implied, require either the expression 
of the Relative in Latin, or the insertion of 
an Adjective or Participle, or else the in- 
clusion of the Prepositional phrase between 
a Substantive and Adjective ; e.g. ' Qui erant 
in navi,' ' Praelium Cannense,' * meum erga te 
stadium.' 

There is an exception to this rule in the case of of Where of is used foi 
the Possessive Inflection 's, it is rendered by the Latin Genitive. See also 
Paragraph 33 for other exceptions. 

21. Other uses of 'the' that require notice (73) are : — 

I am not THE man to do thus Non is sum qui hoc faciam 
He was TK1& first to rise Ille primus surrexit 

The t sooner, the better Quo citius, eo melius 

The, when meaning the great, requires care, e.g. ' I 
perceived the kindness with which I was welcomed by 
Tullius/ If you translate this ' Intellexi benevolentiam, 
quacum me Tullius excepit/ the meaning is, 1 1 perceived 
kindness, with which/ &c. But the object of pe?reived is, 
not really kindness, but the whole of the phrase defined by 
'the.' This can only be expressed in Latin by using a 
dependent interrogative form that shall shew that the 

* Such expressions as prseiium ad C annas, epistola ad Bal- 
bum (data), though they sometimes occur, are to be avoided. 

t In Early English thi was used as the Ablative of the Demonstrative and 
of the Relative, quo . . . eo. See Shakespearian Grammar, Par. 94. 



Par. 24.] l A/ 19 

object of intellexi is, not benevolentiam, but ' quanta me 
benevolentia Tullius exciperet.' See Paragraph 53. 

22. ' a/ 'no/ * every.' >4 is generally unexpressed: 
but, if it means l a certain ' as in ' a man once said to 
me, ; it is sometimes translated by quidam. 

Carefully distinguish between, on the one hand, a re- 
ferring to a class — ' a high tree, arbor (-es) alta (-se), 
is more exposed to lightning than a low one' — and, on 
the other hand, a when referring to an individual of that 
class : ' a tall tree (alta quaedam arbor) stood in my 
garden.' Often a approximates to a kind of, e.g. ' a 
curious torpor/ 'mira quaedam inertia.' 

No when applied to persons, e.g. ' no poet,' must be 
rendered by nemo (ne homo) (not by nullus), e.g. ' nemo 
poeta,' i.e. ' no man, provided that he is a poet/ 

Every must not be rendered by omnis (which generall) 
means all) but by omnes, or, with Superlatives, b) 
quisque. The Superlative, being regarded as a Nouu 
and emphatic, comes first, i doctissimus quisque.' 

23. English Present Participles are freely used as 
Adjectives. We speak of ' a degrading, humiliating, per- 
flexing, pleasing, amusing, annoying state of things. 
The preceding a or the enables us thus easily to converi 
Participles into Adjectives, The Latins, not having the 
Articles, have not the same converting facility. 

Rule — Present Participles must not be 
used, as Adjectives in Latin unless the use 
is established by authority, as ' sapiens.' 

Adjectives must be used instead, e.g. turpis for de- 
grading : or the sentence may be turned so as to use a 
Verb. 

24. Adverbs and Adverbial phrases in English are 

very often compounded with Prepositions, e.g. a-foot, 

C 2 



20 ADVERBIAL PHRASES. [Par. 25. 

a-main, at home ', in haste, with anger, by right, of course. 
In such phrases, with is the most common Preposition, 
and it is therefore useful to remember the following : — 

Rule — 'With* must not be translated by 
the simple Ablative unless it denotes in- 
strumentality. 

Eg. ' He struck me with a stick/ ' Baculo me percussit : 
but ' He answered with impetuosity, * vehementer re- 
spondit ; ' or ' Cum vehementia respondit.' 

N.B. — If an Adjective comes between with and its 
Substantive, e.g. ' with great impetuosity/ the Ablative 
may be used : ' summa vehementia.' 

There are all degrees of any quality, e.g. celeritas. The Abl. in 
'celeritate adiit ' is felt not to define the manner : for the question arises 
* -with what speed?' But join summa to it, and we get an Adverbial 
expression defining the manner. The English 'with speed,' means ' with 
(great) speed.' 

Rule — « In,' when used metaphorically in 
English, must not be rendered by ' in ' in 
Latin. 

E.g. in time meaning at last, is tandem, or, meaning 
punctuality , is tempori ; in haste is celeriter, or summa 
celeritate (but not celeritate). In my opinion is me 
judice. 

In, meaning in the case of, is sometimes found in Latin used metaphori- 
cally : in ThemistOCle, in the case of Themistocles. 

The following Ablatives are regarded as Adverbs and do not require Ad- 
jectives. In due course, recte a'tque or din e; methodically, via et 
ratione j in word,^ verbo } in appearance, specie ] in reality, re, or 
re ipsa; rightly, jure 5 not unnaturally, neque injuria 5 withforce y 
vi ; with craft, dolo. There are other exceptions that should not be used 
by beginners. 

25. Adverbs. The following Adverbs require care. Now 
sometimes means at the prese?it moment : in that case it 
is in Latin nunc. Sometimes it means by this time, or 
already : in that case it is jam. 



Par. 25.] ADVERBS. 21 

/ have been watting for Jam triduum expecto 
now three days 

Can you see me now ? Num me nunc videre potes ? 

Rule — ' Nunc' applies to the Present sim- 
ply; 'jam* to the Present considered with 
reference to the Past or Future, i.e. after past 
waiting, by this time, or, before it was expected, al- 
ready. 

Only sometimes expresses something less than was ex- 
pected : 'he only spoke ; he did nothing.' In these cases 
use tantum. Where o?ily means by himself, by itself use 
solus (m).* •' Not only ' is almost always ' non solum,' or 
' non mode' In ' if only/ ' provided only/ the Latins use 
modo. Sometimes only is to be expressed by nihil aliud 
quam. ' In his old age, instead of riding he only walked,' 
' Senex, omissa equitatione, nihil aliud quam deambu- 
labat.' 

More, when used with verbs and meaning to a greater 
extent, is plus 5 when used with Adjectives, and also when 
meaning rather, it is magis. 

I love him MORE than his Amo ilium plus quam fra- 
br other trem ejus 

He is MORE dutiful to his Ille magis est quam tu erga 
father than you are patrem pius f 

I hope more (rather) than Magis spero quam timeo 
fear 

With numbers, use supra as Preposition or amplius 
See Paragraph 41, ' Above? 
Note the curious construction : 

He was MORE foolhardy Audacior erat quam fortior 
than bold 

* In this case, alone is preferable to only. 

t Adjectives ending in -eus, -ius, and others that do not take the 
Comparative in -ior, take magis instead of the termination. 



22 PREPOSITIONS. [Par. 26. 

Once is (1) forte, once upon a time; (2) semel, once for 
a ^j (3) quondam or olim, formerly. 

26. Tlie Prepositions in English do the work, not only 
of the Latin Prepositions, but also of many of the Latin 
cases, and (as will be seen hereafter) of many of the Latin 
Conjunctions. Consequently, in translating them into 
Lati^ they require especial care. Distinguish always be- 
tween the original local meaning of a Preposition and its 
subsequent metaphorical meaning. Thus of or off origi- 
nally meant ?notio?i from : in Early English we find ' the 
leaves fall of {off) the tree/ Later, the purely local mean- 
ing of motion from was used to express an action that 
proceeded from the agent, 'we were received of* {by) the 
most pious Edward/ Lastly, coming to mean connection 
of any kind, of was used of anything, not proceeding from, 
but belonging to, anyone, e.g. i the misfortunes of this 
worthy man.' 

It is evident that the same notion, e.g. agency or price, 
may be represented by a different Preposition according 
as the notion is regarded. Thus, an action may be re- 
garded as coming out of the agent ; in that case we may use 
of as in Elizabethan English. But it may also be regarded 
as near, i.e. by {by originally meant near), the agent. So 
price may be represented by at, denoting neighbourhood 
and hence equivalence, ox for denoting (1) standing before, 
or in the place of and hence (2) equivalence ; or in certain 
context you may say ' I bought it with my last shilling/ 
treating it as an ordinary action performed with, i.e. near, 
the instrument. 

The differences in Prepositions are so slight that they 
vary with the slightest variety of context ; and some Pre- 
positions that were in fashion during one period pass out 
of fashion in another. Thus we cannot now say as 
Shakespeare did, C I live with bread/ 'he died with tickling/ 
but with after ' disagree ' is not yet entirely supplanted 
by from. 

This being the case, before going through all the idioms 

* Mdcbetk. ill 6. an. 



Par. 28.] EXTENSION. 23 

connected with the several Prepositions, we should go at 
once to the notioits represented by the Prepositions, and 
consider how those notions aie to he represented. In a 
language like the Latin, abounding in cases, the Preposi- 
tions have not been so much used as in English, and have 
consequently not so often assumed metaphorical meanings. 
They are mostly used locally ; the metaphorical English 
Prepositions are mostly represented by the Latin cases. 

27. Extension. For means sometimes as an equivalent 
for (one thing standing in the front of, i.e. in the stead of, 
another): eg. ' Fro tantis tuis mentis, quid tibi dabo?' 
sometimes on accotmt of ob or propter ; sometimes, from 
its meaning of equivalence, it is used almost redundantly 
to mean as much as before time and space, e.g. ' he walked 
for five miles,' ' he waited for ten minutes.' The Latins do 
not use (nor do the English always) a redundant Prepo- 
sition here, but put the noun in the Accusative as a kind 
of Object after the Verb, eg. ' Tridui iter processimus/ 
' Decern jam dies hie moramur.' The for is omitted with 
the Adjectives long, broad, deep, high, ' Hasta sex pedes 
longa/ ' Fossa decern pedes alta.' 

Rule — Extension of time ana space is ex- 
pressed by the Accusative. 

For, before time, when followed by a negative — e.g. ' For the last ten 
years he never came ' — is not expressed by the Accusative. The notion of 
extension seemed to the Latins lost, as there was no action going on during 
the time; and the meaning seemed to be 'within ten years.' The Latins 
therefore used (see 28) the Ablative: 'Decern axmis Romam non 
venit.' Often his, i.e. ' last,' is added : * Nemo his decern aimis talia 
ausus est.' 

23. Point of time. At, in, by (all denoting neighbour- 
hood) are used in English to denote the time when a 
thing is done. In Latin T the Ablative (which expresses a 
circumstance *) is naturally used to denote this. 

* "The Ablative denotes in general that a thing belongs to the predicate 
as serving to complete and define it more accurately (so that it stands with 
the thing predicated in the relation of an aftpurtena7ice or circumstance)* ' — 
Madvig's Latin Grammar. 



24 POINT OF TIME, PRICE. [Par. 29. 

1 Tertio anno urbs capta est/ ' Saturni Stella triginta 
fere annis cursum suum conficit. , 

Rule — The Ablative denotes the time at 
which or within which anything is com- 
pleted. 

A t, of place, must be expressed by ad or in, not by the Ablative by 
itself; ' ad hunc locum,' ' hoc in loco ; ' not ' hoc loco.' 

Hieme, sestate, die, nocte, lnce, are also used for the season 
within which anything is done — ' in winter,' 'by day,' &c 

29. Price is expressed in English indefinitely by at, 
definitely by for or (rarely) by with. The English at 
(perhaps representing contiguity) is expressed by the Latin 
Genitive, perhaps the Genitive of quality.* The Latins 
do not use pro to denote price. For and with (in- 
strumental) are represented by the Latin Ablative (denot- 
ing a circumstance, see Paragraph 28, Note). It would 
seem that price when indefinite (as it is when you ask 
how much a man will offer) is regarded by the Latins as 
a quality, and expressed by the Genitive ; when aefinite, it 
is regarded as an instrument and expressed by the 
Ablative. 'At what price did you buy the rice?' 'Oh, 
for a small sum.' l Quanti oryza empta est ? } ' Parvo.' 

Rule — The price is expressed by the Ab- 
lative. 

Rule — Tanti, quanti, pluris, minoris (but 
magno, parvo, plurimo, &c.) are used after verbs 
of selling and buying. 

Rule — Magni, pluris, plurimi, parvi, mi- 
noris, minimi, tanii, quanti, and nihili are used 
after verbs of estimation, and after est signifying // is 
worth. 

This seems to be a kind of Genitive of quality. The same construction, 
after non sestimo, facio, &c. is used with assis, flocci, &c. ' Non 
te flOCCi facio,' ' I don't value you at a straw.' 

• Madvi# says, " This Genitive is nearly allied to the Descriptive Genitive. ,J 



Par. 32.] FULNESS AND WANT. 25 

30. Fulness, in English, is generally expressed by Verbs 
and Adjectives followed by of or with. Of denotes that 
the fulness arises out of something ; with, that the fulness 
is connected with something. Of is represented by the 
Latin Genitive, which in the best authors follows plexms. 
With (or in, e.g. ( abounds in 1 ) is represented by the Latin 
Ablative, which naturally follows Verbs, e.g. compleo and 
impleo, to express the instrument by which the state of 
fulness denoted by the Verb is brought about. 

Rule — Adjectives, as well as Verbs, ex- 
pressing fulness are followed by the Geni- 
tive or Ablative. 

See Paragraph 13. 

31. Emptiness is generally expressed in English by of 
ox from, t void of/ ' free from.' Of denotes motion of {off) 
and then comiection, ' as regards ' ; from denotes more 
distinctly motion from. Hence, in Latin, the Genitive is 
used where connection, motion in search of, need of, is 
denoted ; and the Ablative (which represents an external 
circumstance *) is used where motion or absence fi'om is 
denoted. Thus l I have need of money ' is ' Egeo pe- 
cuniae/ but ' I am destitute of, i.e. without money/ is 
* Careo pecuniae 

Rule — Adjectives and Verbs denoting 
emptiness are followed by the Genitive or 
Ablative. 

(1) Inops, pauper, egrenus, indigus, and parens take the 
Genitive. (2) Inanis, nndns, orbns, vacnus, liber, immunis, 

purus {clean from), extorris and alienns (which last is generally 
followed by ab), take the Ablative ; so also do the verbs spolio, absti- 
neo, libero, solvo, levo, exonero, arceo, pronibeo, take the 
Ablative of the thing. 

32. English Prepositions following Adjectives may 

often be rendered by the Latin Ablative. The reason for 

* See Paragraph 28, Note. 



26 PREPOSITION BETWEEN TWO NOUNS. [Par. 33. 

this is, that many Adjectives, having the force of Participles 
and describing a state, naturally take the Ablative to denote 
the instrument producing the state. Thus ' relying on 
your help' is ' fretus (supported by) tuo auxilio' ; 'heavy 
with gold/ ' onustus (laden with) auro.' So with prsedi- 
tns and contentus. In the following rule the Adjectives 
have not the force of Participles ; the Ablative rather 
expresses a circumstance, i dignus mercede/ i worthy in 
point of pay.' 

Rule — ' Dignus * and * indignus ' take the 
Ablative. 

Of in 'born of obscure parents' has its radical 
meaning off or from. It is therefore naturally repre- 
sented by the Ablative in Latin. 

Rule — 'Natus/ 'satus/ ' ortus,' ' genitus,' 
1 editus,' take the Ablative. 



33. A Preposition between two Nouns in English 
often denotes that the second is the object of an 
action implied by the first, e.g. (1) ' hunger for gold, ; (2) 
'experience in warfare/ (3) 'incitement to danger/ (4) 
'rules about life/ (5) ' exemption from warfare/ In a 
great number of these cases, the English Preposition 
might be replaced by as regards. Now this as 7'egards is 
one of the radical meanings not only of the English of 
but also of the Latin Genitive. Consequently this Ob- 
jective relation, as regards, is expressed in Latin by the 
Genitive, e.g. (1) * Ami. fames/ (2) ' Rei militaris peritia/ 
(3) ' Pericuii incitamentum/ (4) '' Vitae prsecepta/ (5) ( Mi- 
iitise vacatio.' 

This is called the Objective Genitive. 

Rule — A Preposition (often < of ' or 'for') 
between two Nouns, if it denotes that the 



Par. 35.] 'OF, 9 'IN: 27 

second is the Object of the first, is often ex- 
pressed by the Latin Genitive. 

The Genitive is hence sometimes ambiguous : eg. * Injuriae-ffichiornm' 
may mean ' injuries done by, or done io, the /Edui.' 

34. ' Of' after a Participial Adjective, formed from a 
Transitive Verb, is found, though not often, in English, eg. 
1 1 spci7'e my purse/ ' he is sparing of his purse/ The fact 
is, sparing is here a kind of noun, and the construction is 
the same as* in ' he is a niggard of his money/ This of 
meaning as regards, is rendered in Latin by the Genitive, 
and such Participial Adjectives often occur in Latin where 
there are no corresponding Participial Adjectives in 
English. 

Rule — (1) Latin Active Present Participles 
from Transitive Verbs, when used as Ad- 
jectives, and (2) Adjectives in -ax, from 
Transitive Verbs, take the Genitive, e.g. * La- 
borum patiens.' 

So amans, cap ax, edax, tenax, prudens, insolens, 
potens,t impotens. 

35. 'Of' and 'in' after several other Adjectives in 

English are used in the sense of 'as regards.' These 
Adjectives suggest an object : e.g. 'he is greedy ' suggests 
the question ' he is greedy as regards what ? ; Such Adjec- 
tives mostly express desire, expe7'ience or ine\pe7'iencc, 
knowledge or ignorance, participation, guilt, innocence, 

* Unless it is a result of the genuine Old English (still preserved in 
the slang of London and perhaps of other places), ' he is a-sparing (in or 
on sparing) of his purse.' Compare 'the shepherd blowing of his nails,' 
3 Henry VI. ii. 5. 3. — Shakespearian Gram-mar, Paragraph 178. 

\ Many Genitives after Adjectives may be explained by saying that the 
Adjective implies a Verb and Noun, which Noun naturally governs the Geni- 
tive. Thus potens means having power of. Compare 

'The sovereign power you have of 'us.' — Ho,mlet, ii. 2. 27. 
So 9 in Greek. X«*vf£ diioipoQ soti means ovk e%ei nolpav Xvmnc. 



28 ■ OF: [Par. 36. 

e.g. 'inexperienced in treachery/ 'greedy of praise.' 
These Prepositions are rendered by the Latin Genitive, 
which naturally expresses the connection implied in as 
regards. 

Rule — An English Preposition between an 
Adjective and a Noun, when denoting that 
the Noun is the object of the Adjective, is 
often rendered by the Latin Genitive, e.g. 
* Avidus laudis,' ' Perfidiae imperitus/ 

So, avarus, cupidus, conscius, inscius, nescius, rudis, 
gnarus, ignarus, peritus, memor, immemor, particeps, 
expers (also Abl.), reus, insons. 



36. ' Of' after the Verbs accuse, acquit; but not after 
condemn, is used in English in the sense of as regards, 
about. In Latin the Genitive, which answers to this use 
of of, is more common. But as these verbs are also used 
with the Instrumental Ablative crimine followed by the 
Genitive of the charge, it is possible that the Genitive 
depends on crimine understood. 

Rule — ' Accuso,' i incuso,' ' insimulo,' * ar- 
guo,' * convinco,' ' damno,' * condemno,' ■ ab- 
solvo,' take the Genitive of the charge. 



37. ' Of' preceding a Ncun denoting quality. Of 

meaning out of is naturally placed before the material 
{out) of which anything is made, and hence before 
the qualities that go to make up anything. This use of 
of is rendered, when referring to literal construction, by 
an Adjective, e.g. marmoreus, or by de or e, e.g. x factum 
de or e xnarmore 5 ' but, when metaphorical, by the Latin 
Genitive of Quality, e.g. ' he is a man of honour/ ' sum- 
mae est integritatis/ 'it is a matter of difficulty,' 'res 
est muiti laboris.' The Ablative (denoting ciromv 



Par. 39.] PREPOSITIONS. 29 

stance) can also be thus used : 'vir est summa integri- 
tate.' 

N.B. — Do not omit the Adjective, e.g. write 'smnmse 
(-a) integritatis (-e)/ not ' integritatis (-e) ' alone. 

The reason for the insertion of the Adjective seems to be this: 'puer 
nasOj cr oris est' contains no definition, as all boys have noses and 
faces; but ' naso adunCO,' 'oris pulcri/ imply definition. The Adjective, 
though omitted in English, is really implied, ' he is a man of (great) ability' 

Rule — Of preceding a Noun of quality is 
rendered in Latin by a Genitive or Ab- 
lative. 



38. Of (put of, that which comes from, and hence belongs 
to, anyone) is often preceded by ' the mark ' to express a 
characteristic, e.g. i it is the mark of a philosopher to be 
cautious.' Sometimes we omit 'the mark;' we cannot 
however venture to say ' it is of a philosopher/ but we 
sometimes, especially after a negative, say ' it is not like a 
philosopher to chatter/ The Latins can use the Genitive 
as a Predicate in all such cases, and can say ' Philosophi 
cavere est, or non est garrire.' 

Rule — It is the mark of, It is like, are often ex- 
pressed by the Latin Genitive. 



39. Prepositions implying rest or motion. When an 
action or state is described, the English generally express 
by Prepositions the place where the action takes place. 
On the other hand, the Latins (and Greeks) usually 
express the place whence the action originates, or 
whither it is directed. 

This is ON my side Hoc a me facit 

ON the south-west and Ab occasu aestivo, et ab 
north-east ortu hiberno 

The frtrit was hanging ON Pendebat ex arboribus fruc- 
the trees tus 



3° 



REDUNDANT ' OF. 



[Par. 40. 



He came from (to) his home 
AT Corinth 

On our way we broke down 
the bridge 

But, On our way the enemy 
attacked us 



CorintliO (-nm),domo (-um) 
sua * (-m) venit 

Ex itinere pontem exscidi- 
mus 

Hostis nos in itinere op- 

pressit (rare) 



Rule— English Prepositions denoting rest 
must often be rendered by Latin Preposi- 
tions denoting motion. 

40. The redundant ' of.' Of (partitive) is naturally- 
used in such phrases as ' ten (out) of twenty ; ' but it 
has come to be loosely used, by false analogy, after all, in 
' all of us ' and after a number that does not represent a 
pa?"t but a whole, e.g. i three hundred of us came/ The 
Latins do not adopt this erroneous construction, but say 
' nos omnes, nos trecenti venimus.' A similar redundant 
of is often used between ' town ' or * city/ and the par- 
ticular name of the town or city, e.g. % the city of London.' 
This is not found in Latin : ' urbs Londinium.' 



Rule — Do not 
redundant 'of: 



translate into Latin the 



Of is often used after abstract Nouns, and sometimes ambiguously, e.g. 
"the reminiscences of(1 by or about) Balbus." The Latins dislike ambiguity 
and (3 a) abstract Nouns. Hence : — 



The lop OF the mountain 
The rest OF the ships 

the foundation OF 

the city 
the capture OF the 

soldiers 
the birth OF Tul- 

lius 
sun-rise 



After 
Before 



Summus mons 
Reliquae naves 



(urbem conditam 
milites captos 
Tullium natum 
sol em or turn 



* The anomalous domtim, -i, &c. may be qualified by a Genitive or 
by a Possessive Adjective, but by no otner Adjective. See Par. 16. 



Par. 41.] PREPOSITIONS. 31 

Rule — The Latins often avoid the ambi- 
guous Genitive and the use of abstract 
Nouns, by using an Adjective or Participle 
instead of a Noun in the Genitive, followed 
by another Noun. 

4-1. Dictionary of Prepositions. The following Pre- 
position-idioms will serve to illustrate the difference 
between the English and Latin Prepositions. Preposi- 
tions used as Conjunctions, eg. i befoi'e he could arrive, 7 
and followed by Verbals, e.g. ' before leaving/ are reserved 
for Paragraphs 66, 75. 

The student will not fail to notice the large number of 
compound Prepositions having no corresponding Preposi- 
tions in Latin, and therefore requiring to be rendered in 
some other form. 

About {external neighbourhood ; d-be-out). 

About noon, 8 a.m. &>c. Circiter ) meridiem, se- 

Circa ) cundam horam 

About (towards, coming Ad, better sub, noctem 
up to, getting on 
FOR) nightfall 

About (during, before De nocte surrexit 
the end of, taking 

A PART OUT OF) night 

Above (radical meaning, position over, a-be-ove, where 
ove is connected with over and up) ; (1) above, with 
notion of motion, super ; (2) with notion of rest, supra ; 
(3) above, figuratively, supra. 

This is ABOVE my strength Hoc supra vires est 

Above 500 men were slain Super (or supra) quingentos 

(or Quingenti amplius) 
occisi sunt. 

He is ABOVE deceit Honestior est quam qui 

mentiatur 



3* 



ACCORDING TO. 



[Par. 41. 



According: to. 

According to Herodotus, 
the facts are somewhat 
different 

They will be rewarded 
ACCORDING TO their 
deeds 



Herodoto teste res aliter 
se habet 

Suam quisque pro factis 
mercedem accipient 



After (aft-er). 

When one event comes immediately after another it 
may be regarded as coming out of it. Indeed after is 
derived from of a comparative formed from of (Morris) 
and may therefore naturally be rendered by out of which is 
an emphatic way of expressing of Hence, beside the 
more usual post : 



Im?7iediately AFTER his con- 
sulship he left Rome 

One thing after (on the 
HEELS OF) another 

He waited day AFTER day 

After your letter they read 
mine 

After (following on, 
but not immediately) 
this battle 

The day after the battle 

After (next to) God,you 
are my hope 

After (coming close to) 
the manner of a battle 

After the manner of 
slaves 



Ex consulatu Roma ex- 
cessit 

Aliud ex alio me turbat 

Diem ex die expectabat 

Sub {following from below) 
tuas literas, statim reci- 
tabant meas 

Secundum (rare) hanc pug- 
nam. 

Postridie pugnam 

Secundum Deos, in te spem 
pono 

Ad similitudinem pugna? 
milites sese exercebant 
Ad modurn servorum 



Against (i) when preceded by a verb of motion is often 
rendered by Latin, in, eg. < Incitare in ;> (2) when mean- 



Par. 41. J 



* as to: 



33 



ing ' in opposition to/ by contra, ' Conjurant contra rem- 
publicam ;' (3) when meaning active hostility, by adversus, 
* Adversus te contendimus.' 



Agreeably to (i.e. in agreement with). 



A re you acti?ig agreeably 
TO your orders in loiter- 
ing here ? 

We ought to live AGREE- 
ABLY TO nature 

We will speak AS AGREE- 
ABLY as possible to the 
truth 



Num ad {up to) praescrip- 
tum agis, hie tempus 
terens ? 



VI- 



Naturae convenienter 

vendum est 

Dicemus quam maxime ad 
veritatem accommodate 



Among {mixed with). (1) Of nations and large socie- 
ties, apud ; (2) meaning in the number of, in ; (3) meaning 
conspicuous amid, inter ; (4) meaning selected from among, 
e ', (5) after a verb of motion, literal or metaphorical, 
sometimes in. 



Among the Germans 

Pam is recko7ied AMONG 
the most serious evils 

A battle memorable AMONG 
the few defeats of the 
Roman people 

He was the only one AMONG 
seven that lived to man- 
hood 

I will divide the booty 
among my companions 



Apud Germanos 

Dolor in maximis malis 
ducitur 

Pugna memorata inter 



paucas 
clades 



Romanorum 



Unus e septem 
virilem sumpsit 



togam 



Praedam in socios distri- 
buam 



Around, see Round. 



As for, as regards, as to, when at the beginning of the 
sentence, may be rendered by Quantum (or qnod) attinet 

ad ; when in the middle, by de {concerning). 



34 



AT. 



[Par. 41. 



At (neighbourhood). 

At the mercy of Balbus 

The city is at the mercy of fire 

At {i.e. close to or fol- 
lowing on) this 

I aim-AT, laugh-AT, look- 
at, you 



In maim or potestate Balbi 
Urbs incendiis est obnoxia* 
Sub or ad hsec 

Te peto, rideo, specto 



N.B. — Not ' miror te/ unless you mean 'I admire 
you.' Better ' admirationem mihi moves/ if you mean 
' I am surprised AT you.' 



AT THE BE- \ 

ginning OF > the battle 
At THE END OF ) 

He is AT THE POINT OF 

death 



Incipiente 
Fin em capi 
ente 



X 



jam pugna 



In eo est nt moriatur 



Before (in the fore part) : (1) generally ante, after verbs 
both of rest and motion ; (2) prse after verbs of motion, 
immediately in front of often used in the phrase prse se ; 
(3) pro, rest in front of; (4) ob, motion to meet, to the 
face of ; (5) apud, more rarely e.d, in the presence of {a 
body of people) ; (6) coram, in the p7'esence of (an indi- 
vidual), face to face with. 

When before is applied metaphorically to (7) time, ante 
is used ; when to (8) preference, ante, or (rarely) prse. 

He sent the cavalry before Equitatum ante se misit 
him (but, prsemisit) 

He held a dagger BEFORE Pugionem prse se tulit 
him 

They were 071 guard BE- Pro portis in statione erant 

FORE the gate 
Death presents itself BE- Mors ob oculos versatur 

fore our eyes 

* Tacitus, but not Cicero. 



Par. 41 .] 



BEYOND. 



35 



He was brought to trial Apud judices reus factus est 
before the jury 

He said this BEFORE the Coram rege hate dixit 



ki?ig 



Ten yea?-s before the con- Decimo anno ante Balbum 
sulship of Balbus Consulem 

Baltics was before all in Balbus ante alios in re 
■military distinction militari floruit 



e ow > infra, literally and metaphorically. 
Beneatii j 

This is beneath me Hoc est infra me 

Below is often to be rendered by indignus est, or 
tnrpior est, eg, : 



He is beneath your notice 

Beside. 

This is beside the mark 

He is beside hi?nself 



Turpior est quam ut debeas 
illi irasci (or quam cui) 



Hoc est nihil ad rem, or 
proposito alienum 

Non est apud se 



Besides, when meaning in addition to, prseter; but 
' Besides this there was &c.' is often rendered ' H\ic 
accedebat ut esset &c.' 



Beyond: (1) of space and time, ultra; with motion, 
sometimes prseter 3 (2) outside, extra; (3) metaphorically, 
exceeding, supra. 



The lake had swollen be- 
yond its limits 

This is beyond belief 

Beyond question 



Lacus prseter modum ere 
verat 

Hoc supra fidem est 

Sine ulla dubitatione 
D 2 



36 



'but: 



[Par. 41. 



But (connected with out; leaving out), prseter. After 
a negative, or a question implying a negative, this Prepo- 
sition is sometimes replaced by the Conjunction nisi. 



What else was history 
then, but mere a?inal- 
writing ? 

He ALL BUT (EVERYTHING 

except) took the city 



Quid turn erat historia nisi 
(if it was not) annalium 
confectio ? 

Urbem tan turn non (just 
so much as not) cepit 



By {neighbourhood, hence agency, cause, instrumentality). 



I have a garden BY the 
Tiber 

I was sitting BY Balbus 

We travelled BY SEA, but 
the journey is mostly 
performed BY land 

Whenever he was BY him- 
self 

He did it BY himself 

/ shall return BY {my re- 
turn is fixed for, so as 
to come up to) the thir- 
teenth of April 



Ad (place) Tiberim "hortum 
habeo 



Apnd (person) 
sedebam 



Balbum 



In navi vecti sumus ; iter 
autem plerique pedibus 
conficiunt 

Quoties solus erat 

Ipse, nullis adjuvantibus, 

hoc fecit 

Ad Idus Ap riles redibo 



By signifying agency is rendered by a or ab to denote 
that the action comes from the agent ; signifying instru- 
mentality, by the Ablative, which denotes a circumstance, 
and therefore, among others, the instrument ; signifying 
a medium, a remote instrument, by per. 



/ was informed BY letter, 
BY spies, d^c. 

By stealth, craft, degrees 



Per literas, exploratores, 
certior factus sum 

Furtim, dolo, paulatin 



Par. 41.] 



'during: 



37 



If not BY fair means, the?t 

BY foul 

Ireland is less BY (instru- 
mentality) a half than 
Britain 

Day by (following on) 
day ; one by one 

By (in the presence of) 

Heaven ! 

By (according to) what you 
say, there is no hope 

By way of showing his 
gratitude, he %ave me 
this present 



Si possis recte ; sin minus, 
quocunque mo do 

Hibernia dimidio minor est 
quam Britannia 

In dies ; singuli 

( Proh deum atque homi- 
< num fidem ! 
( Hercle ! 

Hsec si vera dicis, spes 
nulla restat 

Hoc mihi donum dedit, 
quippe grati in me 
animi documentum 



Rule — ' By ' signifying agency must be 
followed by ' a ' or ' ab ' with the Ablative. 



Concerning, de, presents no difficulty. 



Considering. 



He was well read, con- 
sidering his youth, or 
as boys go 

Considering (in propor- 
tion to) our numbers, 
our country is small 



Multas erant, ut (dicam) in 
puero literae, or ut est 
captns puerorom 

Fines, pro multitudine 
nostra, angustos habe- 
mus 



During: (1) all through, in the course of, per; (2) in 
the midst of, inter ; (3) in, in (rare) ; (4) often rendered 
by dam, or by an Absolute Ablative. 



3« 



DURING. 



[Par. 41. 



During three years, he 
used to read during his 
tunner 

During the night he saw a 
dragon 

During the reign of Tul~ 
Hits 

He used to walk DURING 
his sleep 



Per triennum, inter coenam 
le^ebat 



Secundum or per quietem 
(but also in quiete) visus 
ei draco 

Tuilio rege 
Dormiens ambulabat 



Except (prseter with ace). 

Where except is followed by that, or by a Preposition, it 
really governs a phrase and is a Conjunction, not a Pre- 
position. It is then to be rendered by (1) prseterquam, 
or (after a negative expressed or implied in a question 
expecting a negative answer), by (2) nisi. 



/ am charmed by my estate, 

EXCEPT THAT it is not 

fertile enough 

I sent 7to letter EXCEPT TO 
you 

With the exception of 
07ie or at most two 



Prsedia valde me delectant, 
nisi quod parum fertilia 
sunt 

Nullas literas prseterquam 
or nisi ad te misi 

Excepto uno aut ad sum- 
mum altero 



Excluding, exclusive of. 

Exclusive of (besides) 
his personal property, 
he has large estates 

Exclusive of {not to speak 
of) faults, he has com- 
mitted shameful C7'imes 



Prseter pecunias, praedia 



magna habet 



Flagitia, nedum or ne di- 
cam, culpas admisit 



For, radical meaning in front of: hence (1) in place 
{stead) of; (2) in behalf of ; (3) for the sake ofj (4) regard 



Par. 41.] 



'FOR. 



39 



being had to; (5) because of; (6) for the purpose of; (7) 
with a view to ; (8) as good as ; (9) as much [long) as ; 
(10) for the price of; (11) for what concerns; (12) about. 



They ttse shells FOR (in- 
stead of) 7)ioney 

He exchanges honour FOR 
money 

We must fight FOR (IN BE- 
HALF OF) our country 

I fear for you, not for 

iiiyself 
For heaverHs sake, /<^ 

;;z£ / 
The battle was sanguinary 

FOR (REGARD BEING 

had TO) the nuirber of 

the co?nbatants 

I cannot speak FOR ('BE- 
CAUSE OF) joy 

He took a bribe FOR decidi?ig 
a suit 



Pro nummo conchis utun- 

tur 
Argentum fama mutat, i.e. 

i buys with fame 7 

Pro patria dimicandum est 

Tibi non mini timeo. (rare) 

Per te deos oro ut mihi 
subvenias 

Prselium atrocius erat quam 
{cequum erat expectare) 
pro numero pugnantium 

Prse gaudio nequeo eloqui. 
(After a negative.) 

Ob rem judicandam pecu- 
niam accepit 



Also in this last sense, propter and de. 



He had been selected FOR 

(FOR THE PURPOSE OF) 

the contest, winch had 
been fixed FOR (WITH 

A VIEW TO, LOOKING 

FORWARD TO) the fol- 
lowing day 

I will set out FOR Athe7is 

I will wait FOR THE PRE- 
SENT, or, if you wish, 

FOR A LONGER TIME 



In certamen electus erat, 
quod in posterum diem 
constitutum erat. (After 
a Verb of motion, real 
or metaphorical.) 



Athenas proficiscar 

In pra^sens vel, si posces ; 
diutius expectabo 



4° 



'FOR. 



[Par. 41. 



This will serve for (as 
GOOD as) an example 
to us 

He waited at first FOR (as 
MUCH as) ten days, then 
FOR (LONG DURATION) 
two whole years 

For how much did you 
buy this ? FOR a small 
sum 

For (for what con- 
cerns) my part, I shall 
go away 

We are badly ojf FOR pro- 
visions 

As FOR (for what con- 
cerns) the prisoners, 1 
know nothing about 
them 

FOR beauty she excels them 
all 



For (for what con- 
cerns) success he is 
too slothful 

He is too hasty for (for 
what concerns) me 

He was too late FOR the 

DINNER 

There is no cause FOR de- 
spair 

He may die FOR (for 
what concerns) me 



Hoc nobis exemplo erit. 
(See Par. 17.) 

Homo primura decern dies, 
postea per biennium 
expectabat. (See Par. 

27.) 

Quanti hoc emisti ? Parvo« 
(See Par. 29.) 



Equidem abibo 

A re frumentaria laboramus 






Quod attinet a-d captivos, 
or, De capfcivis, nihil 
habeo compertum 

Mulier, pulcritudine (Instr.) 
quidem, or quantum ad 
pulcritudinem facile est 
princeps 

Xgnavior est quam qui or 
quam ut possit rem 
bene gerere 

Vehementior est quaxn qui 
or quam ut possit mihi 
placere 

Serius advenit quam ut 
posset e convivis esse 

Non est cur desperes 
Per me licet pereat 



Par. 41.] TOR: 41 

FOR (FOR WHAT CON- Quod sciam 

cerns) all I know 

FOR (AS FAR AS REGARDS, Quodcunque {or Quamvis 

IN SPITE OF) all you say, multa) dixeris, non mihi 

you will not persuade persuadebis 
me 

[am FOR Tullius Equidem TuUio studeo 

You are no match for him Scito te esse iiii imparem 

So much FOR (about) this De hac re hactenus 
subject 

For .... to. For was once used before to as a sign 
of the infinitive, used in the sense of purpose, e.g. ' What 
went ye out for to see ? ■ Hence sometimes, where for is 
apparently a Preposition governing a Noun, it is really 
connected with to, and perhaps should be considered as 
governing the whole of the following clause, eg. ' The 
wind sits fa.11* for news to go, i.e. for the going of news, to 
Ireland, ad perferendum nuntium.' 

This use of for is especially common after too, < He is 
too deceitful for me to believe him.' Here for is not to 
be taken with me, but with me-to-believe, i.e. < for the 
purpose of making me believe, he is too deceitful.' This 
the Latins render thus : ' he is more deceitful than anyone 
that I should believe :> < Hie est faiiacior quam cui equi- 
dem credam.' (See Par. J$.) 

Sometimes there is no notion of purpose, as in ' it is 
rare /fcr/ 'it is common for,* in which cases the Latins 
would generally turn the sentence by the Adverbs 
raro, saepe/ sometimes by fit nt. 

// is rare for him to com- Raro culpam admittit or 
mit a fault Raro fit ut culpam 'ad- 

mittat 

After 'it is better/ for is rendered by the Infinitive. 

* Richard I L ii. 2. 123. 



42 



FOR. 



[Par. 41. 



// is better for 0#<? //zrt/z to 
suffer than FOR rz whole 
nation to perish 



Melius est civem unum 
aliquid incommodi ac- 
cipere quam civitatem 
totam perire 



For often connects two nouns in the sense of about, as 
in * a signaler battle/ ' grief for his daughter/ ' no room 
for friendship.' In this sense it is often expressed by the 
Latin Objective Genitive. (See Par. 33.) 

For in the sense of about often follows English Verbs 
signifying desire, e.g. to ask, long, seek, pine, search, for. 
These would be rendered by single verbs in Latin, rogo, 
cupio, qusero, &C. 



From {fro-m, where m is a superlative suffix ; cognate 
with Eng. fore) : (1) away from, a; (2) down from, de j 
(3) out ofe; (4) after Verb of motion, often rendered by 
Latin Dative, the motion from being expressed by the 
Verb of motion. 



From his childhood, youth, 
&*c. 

From the time when I re- 
turned 

From a slave, you became 
afreedman 

From his name the city 
was called Rome 

I am different from you 



I am different FROM what 
I once was 

He came from Carthage 

He wrested my kingdom 
from me 



Inde a parvo, ab adolescen- 
tia, &c. 

Ex quo tempore redii 

E servo libertus factus es 

Ex or de ejus nomine urbs 
Roma est nominata 

Alius sum ac tu, i.e. I a?n 
different AND you (are 
different) 

Alius sum atque olim fui 

Cartnagine venit (Par. 16) 
Regnum mini eripuit 



Par. 41.] 'INS 43 

From (like for) often follows a No^n or Adjective sig- 
nifying freedom from. In this sense from is often rendered 
by the Latin Objective Genitive, e.g. l rest from cares/ 
'requies cuparum.' (See Par. 33.) 

In, generally rendered by Latin in. in is omitted be- 
fore loco, modo, restate, nieme, which are used adverbi- 
ally. When used metaphorically to describe the manner 
in which a thing is done, as ' in haste/ it must be translated 
in Latin by an Adverb or by cum ; but if the Noun is quali- 
fied by an Adjective, the Ablative is allowed without any 
Preposition. (See Par. 24.) 

( IN haste Cum celeritate ) 

He answered \ or celeriter > rC "j- t 

( m great haste Summa celeritate ) s P onau 

So urbe, civitate, tota ; but in urbe, in civitate. 

Late in the night; in the Multa de nocte ; de tertia 
third watch vigilia {Before the ex- 

piration of) 

Once IN ten days Decimo quoqne die 

In England 1 in Herodotus Apud Anglos ; apud Hero- 

dotum 

in An^iia would not be used except literally, i.e. for 
geographical description. 

In is very rarely used in good English for into, though 
it was so used by Shakespeare,* and it is still good English 
to say, 'he fell in love/ The Latins often use in in this 
sense, with a notion of direction. The Accusative which 
means motion towards, naturally follows in thus used. 

This plain is ten miles IN Campus decern millia 
breadth passu um in latitudinem 

patet (i.e. extends in the 
direction of) 

* Shakespearian Grammar % Paragraph 159. 



44 



9 in: 



[Par. 41. 



He spoke IN this way {to 
this effect) 

He was put in prison 



In or ad hunc modum ora- 
tionem habuit 

In vincula conjectus est 



Rule — ' In,' when expressing direction,* is 
followed by the Accusative. 



He did it IN {influenced by) 
dnger 

In my judgment 

Where IN the world f 

IN ACCORDANCE WITH {i.e. 
IN A MANNER NA- 
TURALLY SPRINGING 
OUT of) the letter, cus- 
tom, opinion, &>c. 

In accordance with 
{i.e. in a manner fol- 
lowing, agreeing 
with) nature, the law, 
&*c. 

In addition to money 

In addition to this, he 
had, &°c. 

In the CASE OF Themis- 
tocles, skill was almost 
cunning 

IN CASE OF his death, what 
will you do ? 

IN COMPARISON WITH 

Balbus you are {excess) 
happy 



Per iram, or iratus hoc 

fecit 

Me judice 

Ubinam gentium ? 

Ex literis, consuetudine, 
sententia, &c. {More 
rarely de, down from) 



Secundum naturam, legem, 
&c. 



Prseter pecumam 

Hue accedebat ut haberet, 
&c. 

in Themistocle peritia fere 
versutia fiebat 

Si mortuus erit, quid fades? 

Prae {beyond) Balbo beatu9 
es 



* It is sometimes said that in after a Verb of motion governs the Accusa- 
tive : but of course this is not strictly true ; * he was walking in a room ' is 
in cubiculo ambulabat.' 



Par. 41.] <fJW 4S 

Miser es ad (if you try to 
comeupto)Balbum. (Or, 
conferre, comparare) 

In compliance with, ex, secundum ; or turn by obsequi 
morera gerere. 

In consequence of, ex, propter, or turn by a Verb or 

Participle. 



In comparison with 
Balbus you are (de- 
fect) miserable 



In consequence of this 
defeat the consul re- 
treated to Mutina 

I was going IN THE DIREC- 
TION OF Arpinum 

I am IN FAVOUR OF you 

This is IN FAVOUR OF 
Balbus 

He wishes to abdicate IN 
FAVOUR OF his son 

In the midst of the 
enemy 

He spoke in opposition 
TO the proposal 

This is IN OPPOSITION TO 
that 

In POINT OF numbers 



Qua clade coactus consul 
Mutinam se recepit 

Ibam Arpinum versus 



A te sto 

Hoc a, or cum Balbo facit 

Vult ita se regno abdicare 

ut succedat filius 
Mediis in hostibus 

Contra sententiam dicebat 

Hasc ab illis discrepant 

Numero, or quod attinet 
ad numerum 



In presence of (See Before.) 

Inquest (or search) of Veritatem 
truth we ought to grudge 
no labour 

In respect of natural 
ability and education he 
was no way deficient 



conquirentes 

dedecet labori parcere 

Nihil illi neque a natura 
neque a doctrina defuit 



In spite of all the citizens 
could do 



Civibus omnia nequicquam 
tentantibus 



4 6 



'INSTEAD Of: 



jPar. 4L 



In SPITE OF my interces- Me frustra deprecante 
sion 



Inside of, intra. (See Within?) 

Instead of: (i) as a substitute for, pro; (2) as good as, 
loco (with Gen.) ; (3) in vicem or vice is used in later 
Latin for as a substitute for. 



Are you ready to die in- 
stead OF your friend f 

He was as it were instead 
OF a brother to me 

Bitu?ne?i was used IN- 
STEAD OF mortar 

Instead of love he gives 
us hatred 

Including, inclusive of. 

There are in all two hun- 
dred of us, INCLUDING 
women and children 



Num pro amico vis mori ? 

Loco fratris erat mihi 

Bitumen vice arenae inter- 
stratum 

Odit, qnum amare debeat. 
(Par. 7S .) 



Omnino ducenti sumus, si 
mulieres liberosque an- 
nuxneraveris 



Like is irregularly used as a Preposition (in the same 
way as near) : ' I write like her.' See Conjunctions, As, 

Near: (1) prope with Ace; (2) close to, propter; 
(3) at, apud 5 (4) near, off, of land and naval battles, ad j 
(5) hard by, juxta. Note the expression ' prope absuxn ab 
aliquo loco ' for ' I am near a place.' 



Of {akin to off, air b, ab) ; (1) motion from; (2) out of; 
(3) in consequence of; (4) connection of any kind; (5) be- 
longing to ; (6) about 



Ireland is on the south- 
west of Scotland 



Hibernia ab occasu aestivo 
ad Scotiam spectat 



Par. 41.] 



of: 



47 



He is within a mile OF the 
city 

This comes of laziness 

He ccmes OF good parent- 
age 

A cup of gold 
A man OF Athens 
The vigour OF youth 

A man of ability 

But, 
A man OF great ability 

Three hundred OF ) 

the citizens > survive 
All OF us ) 

The city OF Rome 

The battle OF Cannes 



Ab urbe minus mille passus 
abest 

Hunc habet fxnetum ig- 
navia 

Parentibus non humilibus 
ortus est 

Poculum ex auro factum, 
or simply aureum 

Civis Atheniensis (not 

Athenarum) 

Vigor juvenum or juve- 
nilis 

Vir ingeniosus (not in- 
genii) 



Vir summi ingenii or sum- 
mo ingenio 

Trecenti ex civibus super- 

sunt 
Nos omnes supersumus 

Urbs Roma 

Prselium ad Cannas pug- 
natum, or Cannense 

Summa arbor, summus 



mons, &C. 



The top OF the tree, moun- 
tain, dr^C. 

DonH stir a fingers 
breadth, no not a hair's 
breadth from this spot 

After the consulship OF 
Tullius 

He died (IN CONSEQUENCE) 
OF hunger 

* Compare for the use of the Ablative : 

' Which is as bad as die with tickling. 

Much Ado about Nothing, iii. t. So 



Ne hinc transversum digi- 
turn, ne latum quide 
unguem abscesseris 

Post consulem Tullium 
Inedia* periit 



48 ' OF: [Par. 41. 

News OF (about) his death Fama de illius morte hue 
has arrived adlata est 

What will become OF my Quid de fratre fiet ? 

brother f 

What do you think OF Quid de his putas ? 

this ? 

Swift OF foot (A-FOOT), Velox pedibus, alacer ani- 

ready OF wit mo 

Of is used partitively in English after eat, taste j but 
an Accusative follows edere, gnstare. 

Of in the sense of about, de, is common after inform, 
know, think, glad, despair, doubt 



Off, motion from, de ; then of situation nautically, some 
way from : this the Latins render by contra, ad, propter, 
or by the ob in objacet, the Verb being followed by the 
Dative. 

The battle took place OFF Pugnatum est ad Actium 
Actium 



On (connected with /*): (1) rest or motion on, in, or 
near something : (2) metaphorically, on or in a certain 
time : (3) position above, super or* Participle ; (4) meta- 
phorically, resting on as a basis, in consequence of after : 
(5) metaphorically, about, de ; (6) metaphorically, as an 
Adverbial Prefix. 

N.B. — On after a verb of motion is often rendered by 
in with Ace, and, after a compound Latin Verb, by a 
Dative. (See Par. 15.) 

Did you not put him ON the Nonne eum in equuleum 
rack f imposuisti ? 

* E.g. 'Oh his shield,' *clypeo exceptum, or snpposito. 



Par. 41.] 



on: 



49 



On earth (as opposed to 
heaven) 

On the Appian road 

He has a wreath ON his 
head 

London is ON the Thames 

On the north, rear, &r*c. 

On our journey 

We held a conference ON 
horseback 

T heard her play ON (with 
THE INSTRUMENTALITY 

of) the lyre, harp, &>c. 
I feed ON bread 
On foot ; on our knees 
On the 26th of October 

On the next, tenth, &r*c. day 

On (in the front part 
of) the platform 

They carried him home ON 
his own shield 



On condition that you pro- 
mise 



On the completion, 
termination of his 
consulship 

On (about) this point 1 
have nothing to say 



Apud mortales ; in hac vita. 

(Terra would mean by 

land.) 
In Appia via 
Coronam in capite habet 

Londinium ad Tamesin si- 
tum est 

A Septentrione, tergo, &c. 

Ex itinere. (Par. 39.) 

Ex equis collocuti sumus 

Audivi illam lyra, cithara, 
&c. canentem 

Pane vescor 

Pedibus ; genibus 

Ante diem septiraum Ka- 
lendas Novembres 



Postero, decimo, 
Pro suggestu 



&c. die 



Clypeo suo (N.B. not ejus, 
as his own is emphatic) 
eum exceptum refere- 
bant 

Ita or Ea lege or ea condi- 
tione (rarely sub ea) ut 
promittas (also Ita or 
Ea lege si promiseris) 

Ex consulatu 
Consulatu peracto 

De hac re nihil habeo quod 
dicam 

E 



5o 



on: 



[Par. 41. 



On a sudden; on purpose 

He is ON the watch for a 
fault 

Evils conie one ON another 

When he was ON THE point 
OF death 

I am ON Cesar's SIDE 

/ am ON neither SIDE 

This is ON our SIDE 

On the side of the Helvetii 
the country is shut in by 
mountains 

On this side, on that 
side, of the Alps 

He excuses himself ON. THE 
plea OF health 



Subito; ccnsulto, de in- 
dustria 

Expectat dum pecces 

Calamitates alia ex alia in- 
sequuntur. (See After.) 

Quum in eo crat ut more- 
retur 

Sentio cum, pro Caesare 

Neutrius partis sum 

Hoc a nobis facit 

Ab Helvetiis montes re- 
gionem includunt 

Cis, ultra Alpes 

Morbi causa sese excusat 
(Instrumentality) 



On account of, propter ; ob ; after negative, prse, per j 
ergo with a Genitive after its case, archaic. Also : 

// is ON ACCOUNT OF my Equidem arnicorum vicem 
friends that I grieve doleo 

Opposite, (1) literally and metaphorically, contra; 
(2) literally, ex adverso, exadversus, followed by Genitive 
or Dative ; (3) right over against, e regione followed by 
Genitive or Dative ; (4) nautically used, off, rendered by 
ob in objacet or oppositum. 

Out of, (1) after a Verb of motion, literally, ex ; (2) out- 
side, beyond, extra ; (3) metaphorically as a result of on 
account of propter, per, or the Ablative with Participle. 



Out of shot 

He obeys the laws OUT OF 
fear 



Extra teli jactum 

Legibus propter me turn, or 
metu coactus paret 



Par. 41.] 



'previous to: 



He did it OUT OF fun 

He is OUT OF his mind 

It is out OF our power to 
acquit one who is guilty 

Outside of, extra. 



Per jo cum id fecit 
Minus est sui compos 

Non est eapotestas nostra 

ut sontem absolvamus 



Over (1), motion or rest over, super; all over, per j 
(2) across, trans ; (3) rest over, supra ; (4) metaphorically, 
more tha?i, super (but better amplius) ; (5; metaphori- 
cally, extending over, duri?ig, per, or Accusative of dura- 
tion ; (6) where over denotes superiority in authority, it is 
generally represented by some compound Verb, e.g. prae- 
sum containing prse and governing the Dative. Over ana 
above is super or prseter. 



We shall pass over the 
Rhine 

The plague lasted over a 
period of ten years 

He was set over the army 

Over against 



Trans Rhenum transjicie- 
mus (the Preposition 
may be omitted) 

Pestis decern (or per decern) 
annos durabat 

Esercitui prsefectus est 

E regicne (from the direc- 
tion) followed by Gen. 
or Dat. 



Owing to. Per, propter, ob. 



// was owing to you that 
I did not succeed 

Pending. 

Pending the decision of 
the judge, the plaintiff 
disappeared 



Per te stetit quominus res 
mihi prospere succede- 
ret 



Ante quam judicari posset, 

petitor subito abierat 
(or re nosdum judicata) 



Previous to, ante, Prep., or antequam, priuscmam, Conj. 
See Before^ and also Paragraph 66. 

£ 2 



52 'regarding: 

Regarding (see With regard to). 
Respecting (see With respect to). 



[Par. 41. 



Relatively to. 

Our loss, though great ab- 
solutely, is yet very slight 
RELATIVELY TO that of 
the enemy 



Cladem re ipsa magnam, 
sed cum hostium clade 
comparatam, levissi- 
mam aceepimus 



Round, Around, (l) circum ; (2) round abotit, less 



exactly, circa, 
circumdare. 



Sometimes expressed by a compound, eg. 



He built a wall ROUND the 
city 

We must send ambassadors 
ROUND TO the neigh- 
bouring nations 



Urbi murum circumdedit 

Legati circa vicinas gentes 
mittendi 



Since (1) with a notion of consequence, from, exj 
(2) dating back from a starting point, with notion of con- 
tinuousness, a, inde a ; (3) with negative as in ' never since? 
post. 



Ever SINCE the beginning 
of the building of the 
bridge 

Since his childhood 

Never since the creation of 
the world 



Ex eo tempore quo pons 
institui cceptus est. (Do 
not omit eo tempore in 

prose.) 

Inde a puero 

Nunquam post homines 
natos 



Through (akin to trans, Germ, durch) (1) radical 
meaning, motion across and out of through the midst of 
per ; (2) applied to time, throughout, during, per; (3) 
metaphorically, indirect agency, per (see Owing to), but 
also turned by opera, beneficio. 



Par. 41.] 



TO. 



53 



// was THROUGH me that 
you recovered Tarentmn 

Through his wealth he 
rose to be king 



Mea opera Tarentum re- 
cepisti 

Divitiarum beneficio rex 
exortus est 



Till (O.E. til = to), ad; usque ad. Often to be 
turned by a Conjunction in Latin. (See 66.) 

To/* (1) meaning motion to or into, ad, in; (2) exten- 
sion of space to, usque ad, tenus ; (3) extension of time to, 
ad, in ; (4) extension of mtmber to, ad ; (5) motion to, 
hence object, purpose, result, in, ad ; (6) motion to, and 
hence comparison with, ad; (7) relation to, conduct to, 
erga, in ; (8) loosely used for as regards. 



He will go first TO Athens, 
then TO Italy 

His kingdom extends TO 
Taurus 

They fought TO a late hour 
in the day 

We lost to the number of 
fifty men; the enemy 
were killed TO a man 

To what end do you say 
this t 

This is TO the purpose 

He spoke to this effect 

Though he's a good fellow, 
he's nothing TO Balbus 

He was dutiful to his 
parents, and strictly loyal 
TO his kin% 



Primum Athenas ibit, turn 
in Italiam. (Par. 16.) 

Tauro tenus regnat 

In multum diei pugnatum 
est 

Nostrorum ad quinqua- 
ginta, hostes ad unum 
occisi 

Quern ad finem {or quor- 
sum) hsec dicis ? 

Haec in rem sunt 

In hanc sententiam dixit 
{or In hunc modum) 

Homo est, ut bonus, ita ni- 
hil ad Balbum 

Pius erat in parentes, per* 
petua erga regem fide 



* For to before Verbs see Paragraph 73. 



54 



touching: 



[Par. 41. 



To my mind, you are wrong 

To the best of his power 

I would TO God I could 
help him 



( Peccas, me judice 

< Pec care mihi quidexn vi- 

( deris 

Pro virili parte 

Ita me Dii ament, ut velim 
ei subvenire 



Touching: (i) as to, quod attinet ad, quod ad; (2) 

concerning^ de. 



Toward : (1) motion in the direction of, adversus; (2) in 
the direction of (sometimes without motion), ad, in ; (3) 
of time, sub with Accusative ; (4) in relation to persons, 
erga, in, with Accusative. 



They charged toward the 
hill which looks TO- 
WARD the north 

Toward night 

He feels TOWARD him the 
love of a brother 



Impetum adversus collem 
fecerunt, qui in or ad 
Septentriones spectat 

Sub noctem 

Amore in eum fraterno est 



Under : literally and metaphorically sub ; followed by 
Ablative, but after Verbs of motion, by Accusative. 

Some metaphors, such as 'under a pretence/ i under 
this head/ are rendered in Latin literally, and not meta- 
phorically, eg, ' per speciem/ ' in hoc genere/ ' by means 
of a pretence/ i in this class.' 



This is placed by Balbus 
UNDER the frst head, 
but seems to me to coiiie 
UNDER the other 

Under pretence of friend- 
ship, and UNDER a show 
of bringing about a 
peace 



Hoc a Balbo quidem in 
primo genere ponitur, 
mihi autem in alteram 
videtur venire 

Per simulationem amicitiae, 
et per speciem pacis 
reconciliandae 



Par. 41.] ■ WITH: 

Under arms in armis 

Under appearance of Specie (adv.) beneficii 
favour 

Under your guidance Te duce 

Under this condition that, Ea lege ut, &c. 

Under these circumstances Quae cum ita sint 
Until (see Till). 
Unto (see To). 



55 



With, radical meaning ' from, against ' (MORRIS) : 
hence, from meaning 'opposite/ it comes to have the 
meanings of (1) neighbourhood, relations friendly or hostile, 
cum ; (2) in the hands of penes ; (3) circumstance, cum 
or Abl. with Adjective ; (4) instrument, Abl. ; (5) circum- 
stance regarded as a cause, t considering, 1 pro ; (6) in 
adverbial phrases to signify 7nanner, Latin Adverb. 



With whom does the de- 
cision rest ? 

He came WITH speed 

With heaven's aid 

WITH your usual wisdom, 
you will beonyo7irguard 

With pleasiwe, reluctance 

They fight with (among) 
one another instead of 
WITH (AGAINST, OP- 
POSITE TO) the enemy 

Having the wind WITH 
him 

With all my heart 



Penes quern est arbitrium ? 

Cum celeritate venit. (Or 
summa celeritate.) 

Diis juvantibus 



Tu 



, pro tua 

cavebis 



prudentia 



Libenter, invitus 

Inter sese pugnant quum 
debeant pugnare cum 
hoste 



Ventum secundum nactus 

Ex animo (i.e. from the 
bottom of my heart) 



56 ■ WITH: [Par. 41. 

// is all over WITH us Actum est de nobis 

What shall we do WITH ( Quid de hoc faciemus ? 
it? \ Quomodo lioc utemur? 

The Verbs / am angry with, irascor (tibi) ; I go on 
with, i.e. continue, persequor ; / find fault with, repre- 
hendo j / agree with, assentior (tibi), illustrate the fact 
that with is often a part of a Compound Transitive Verb, 
and is not to be rendered by a Latin Preposition. 

I am the same* Vf Yin you Idem sum ac tu, i.e. I am 

the same and you are 
(the same) 

I fear it equally WITH you Hoc, aeque ac tu, vereor 

He was at Rome at the Romae, eodem tempore quo 
same ti7ne WITH me ego, vitam agebat 

It would be interesting to discover why other Prepo- 
sitions and other Pronouns are not combined in the fol- 
lowing way : — 

Rule — « Cum ' is used as an enclitic in 
' mecum,' ' tecum,' ' quocum,' « nobiscum/ 
1 vobiscum,' and ' quibuscum.'f 

With reference to \ 

WITH REGARD TO [ De ; quod attinet ad ; 

With respect to J 

sometimes to be expressed by emphasis, with the ad- 
dition of quidem. 

WITH REFERENCE TO Trillium • (quidem) nihil 

Tullius, I have no habeo cur excuses; pro 

ground for asking your ceteris velim pauca 

consideration; for the dicam 
rest I should like to say 
a word 

* This is hardly English, but it corresponds to ' different from. 
\ 'Terms' in ' hactenus,' ' quatenus. 



Par. 42.] PREPOSITIONS OMITTED. 57 

With a view to (ad ; in \ causa with Gen. ; or turn 
by eo consilio ut). 

They all act WITH A VIEW Omnes sibi quisque con- 
TO their own interests sulunt 

Within: (1) of time, space, intra; (2) on this siae of, 
cis, citra. 

He was WITHIN A LITTLE Minimum abfuit quin 

of death periret 

Without: (1) want or abse?ice, sine; (2) outside, extra 5 
(3) turn by Participle, Conjunction, or Adverb. 

He was condemned with- Inauditus damnatus est 
OUT a hearing 

He acted WITHOUT discre- Imprudenter fecit 
Hon 

42. Ellipse of English Prepositions. The Preposition 
by is expressed in English to denote the measure of excess 
or defect, e.g. ' shorter, taller by five feet/' But when the 
amount of excess or defect is mentioned before the Com- 
parative, the Preposition is omitted, ' {by) five feet taller/ 
where ' five feet ' is used, like ' this side/ adverbially. The 
Latins make no difference whether the Comparative pre- 
cede or follow. 

(By) so much the better Eo melius 
(By) how far he surpasses/ Quanto superat ! 
Much worse Muito pejus 

He's (by) a little too late ' Paullo est tardior 

Rule — The measure of excess or defect is 
expressed by the Ablative, e.g. * quinque pedi- 
bus major.' 



58 



CONJUNCTIONS. 



[Par. 43. 



Some prepositional phrase, e.g. to the extent of, amount 
of seems to be required before high, deep, broad, &c. 
The Latins express this absent Preposition mostly by 
the Accusative case, ' Agger erat decern pedes altus ; ' or 
else, less frequently, by the Accusative after habebat, e.g. 
' decern pedes babebat altus .' 

43. Conjunctions, Coordinate and Subordinate. Co- 
ordinate Conjunctions are those that conjoin sentences 
that are parallel and not subordinate the one to the other. 
Thus in 6 1 came and, bid, so, therefore, he returned/ 
we have two coordinate sentences connected by and, &c. 
But in ' I came because he returned/ / came is the state- 
ment or principal sentence, and he returned is only 
introduced as a reason, i.e. subordinately. This may be 
illustrated by a diagram. 



I came, 



and 
he returned. 



Fig. i. 





— >■ 



I came* 



Fig 2. 



Par. 44a.] 'AND,' 'BUT: 59 

In the first diagram the two sentences are parallel ; in 
the second diagram, the sentence he returned is (1) an 
aiding cause, or (2) a neutral circumstance, or (3) an im- 
peding obstacle, and, in each of the three cases, Subor- 
dinate. 



4-A-. Conjunctions Co-ordinate. And is added in 
English, illogically but usefully, to prepare the hearer 
for the last of a number of things enumerated, ' John, 
Thomas, and {lastly) Harry.' The Latins, not disliking 
the abruptness, or preferring logical symmetry to smooth- 
ness, say, 'Johannes, Thomas, Henricus,' or ' Johannes 
et Thomas et Henricus.' 

Rule— In enumerations, ■ et * must be used 
throughout or not at all. 

44a. Enclitic Conjunctions. Too (meaning also), e.g. 

* You too, Brutus ! ' must follow some emphatic word and 
cannot stand first in a sentence. The Latins have many 
such Enclitic Conjunctions. 

Rule- ' Autem/ ' enim/ « quidem,' ' que,' 
1 ve,' ' vero,' * and generally ' igitur ' and 
'tamen,' cannot stand first in a sentence, 
but must follow some emphatic word. 

N.B. — Distinguish between sed and autem. Sed (se-d 
by itself, something distinct from what precedes) qualifies, 
corrects, or denies : autem whereas, while (Greek &), in- 
troduces a second statement not inconsistent with the first. 
Distinguish also between verum but, and vero truly. 

He is a little dull; while I lie quidem tardior ; tu 
you are clever, BUT un- autem ingeniosus, sed 

stable in all your actions in omni vita inconstans 

* Vero stands first in replies, e.g. l Will you come ? Yes, and gladly.' 

* Vero, ac libenter quidem.' 



60 'AND NOT,' 'AND HE. 9 [Par. 45. 

But introducing an objection abruptly is to be rendered 
at enim. 

But you were compelled At enim vi coactus fecisti 
to do it, YOU SAY 



4.5. Negative Conjunctions. In English we do not 
shrink from saying ' and not/ ' and no one ; } but and 
means +> while not often means — , and the Latins felt the 
impropriety of saying 6 et non ' ' +, — ,' where the positive 
and negative are equally emphatic. They preferred to 
bring the negative to the front, and had at command 
the unemphatic form of and, que. They therefore pre- 
ferred to say neque, and also nee quisquam. So neve, 
nisi. For a similar reason the Latins dislike non 
valde, and prefer non ita. They also prefer nego to 
1 dico .... non.' 

Rule — * And not,' ' and no one,' ' if not/ are 
to be rendered by ' neque/ ' nee quisquam/ 
* nisi/ So also * neque unquam/ < usquam/ 
&c. 

We say 'not even Balbus : ' but, in Latin, quidem, being 
an enclitic (44a.) must come after the word that it quali- 
fies. Note therefore the following : — 

Rule — Do not say * ne quidem Brlbus/ but 
« ne Balbus quidem.' 

4-6. ' And he/ ' now he.* The Latins, greatly disliking- 
iUe and is to represent a previous Subject, prefer qui, to 
denote the Subject with the notion of cotmection. 

Rule—* And he/ ' now he/ &c. must often 
be rendered by ' qui/ 

I called on the man AND HE Conveni hominem, qui me 
told me, 8r>c. certiorem fecit, &c. 



Par. 47.] 'AND,' 'BUT.' 61 

Now since THIS is so Quae quum ita sint 

Now when he heard THIS . . Quibus auditis . . . 

He also is often idem. 

Epicurus denied this : HE Epicurus hoc negabat. 

ALSO mai7itained that Idem dictitabat sum- 

pain is tJu greatest pos- mum malum esse dolo- 

sible evil rem 



47. ' And ' and ' but ' omitted. The Latins dislike a 
long string of coordinate clauses, and avoid them by using 
sometimes Participles, sometimes Conjunctions. In Eng- 
lish the power of converting almost any Participle into an 
Adjective, e.g. i the burned cake/ prevents us from using 
the Participle in the same way in which the Latins use it. 
We could not say 'he left the burned bridge ' for 'he 
bumed and left the bridge.' The Latins greatly prefer the 
Participial construction. 

Rule — ' He burned and left the bridge ' = 
c Pontem incensum deseruit.' 



But is also sometimes omitted in the same way : 

/ asked him what he Interroganti mihi quid 
wanted, BUT he made vellet nihil respondit 

no reply 

f But' ' while' should be omitted where two state- 
ments, or questions implying statements, are combined for 
the purpose of bringing out the absurdity of the combina- 
tion. The Latins are fond of occasional abruptness. 

How / are we to suppose Quid igitur ! Hoc pueri 
that this is possible for possunt, viri non pos- 

boys, BUT impossible for sunt ? 

men ? 



But used for that not, see Paragraph 55. 



62 SUBORDINATE CONJUNCTIONS. [Par. 48. 

48. Subordinate Conjunctions. We will first consider 
those that introduce a Subjective or Objective clause. 

That. Take the sentence ' he is honest.' If this is to 
be made the Object of a Transitive Verb, e.g. ' 1 know/ 
we can say ' I know him to be honest] where the Object 
oi know is not kirn, but him to be honest. So the Latins 
say l certo scio ilium probum esse.' But, whether it be 
that we dislike the juxtaposition of the Transitive Verb, 
e.g. know, with a Pronoun, e.g. hint, that is not really the 
Object of that Verb, or whatever be the reason, we cannot 
use this construction in many cases. For example, we 
cannot now say ' I hear or read him to be honest] nor can 
we say * it is certain him to be holiest? The Latins, more 
consistently, use this construction wherever a clause is 
introduced either as Subject or Object. ' Audio (Obj.) 
ilium probum esse,' ' Certum est (Subj.) ilium probum 



In such cases we generally connect the Subject or 
Object with the principal Verb by that {how that) : i I 
hear (Object) {how) that he is honest.' Compare in Greek 
\eyco on, in Low Latin 'dico quod/ in French 'je dis que.' 
So, * that he is honest (Subject) is certain.' 

Rule— Do not translate 'that' by 'lit' 
where it introduces an Objective or Sub- 
jective Clause, but by the Infinitive, eg. 'I am 

persuaded (I know) that it is true.' ' Persuasum est 
mihi hsec vera esse.' 

In order to prepare the way for the Object sentence, the Latins often 
insert an Object pronoun, or an Adverb before the Accusative and Infini- 
tive, ' Sic a majoribus accepimus, injurias non ferendas esse.' ' Quum sibi 
ita persuasisset ipse, &c.' Sometimes ita is followed by ut with the Sub- 
junctive. ( Ita a patribus didicimus ut virtute magis quam dolo conten- 
damus.' 

NoB. — When the Infinitive has a Subject and also an 
Object, both in the Accusative, great care is necessary to 
avoid ambiguity. Thus, what is the meaning of — 
' Aio te, ^acida, Romanes vincere posse ' ? 
The meaning would be clear if the oracle had said 'Aio, 



Par. 49-] ■ THAT: 63 

Pyrrhe, te a R.omanis vinci posse/ using the Passive, 
instead of the Active. 

Rule — Avoid the Ambiguity arising from 
the Accusative before and after the Infini- 
tive. 



49. Exceptions — With ' it seems that, ' it is said that} 
the Latins use the Nominative and Infinitive. 

// seems that Balbus has Videtur Balbus abiisse. 
depai-ted {Balbus seems, &*c.) 

It is said that Balbus lived Fertur (dicitur) Balbus 
to be an old man usque ad Senectutem 

vixisse 

Quin is qui ne, by which not. The Latins regarding 
doubt as preventive, say, instead of i there is no doubt 
that this is true/ ' There is no doubt by which this should 
not be true/ * Haud dubium est quin haec vera sint/ where 
quin is qui-ne, by which not. Hence : 

Rule — ' That ' after ■ there is no doubt/ is 
rendered by ' quin ' in Latin. 

A similar kind of construction is common in Elizabethan English : ' I 
doubt not but to ride as fast as he,' i.e. ' I have no doubt (fear) about being 
preveiited from riding.' — Sltakespearian Grammar ', Paragraph 122. 

N.B. — Note the Periphrasis necessary to express a 
Future passive after quin. 

There's no doubt that Haud dubium est quin 
Europe will soon be futuruxn sit ut Europa 

divided into more parts mox in plures partes 

distribuatur 



Tliat is used in English after / fear, as after / hope, 
think, &r>c. to precede the Object of fear ; ' I fear (What?) 
that he will cornel The Latins render I fear by vereor, 
I watch anxiously, which contains a notion of purpose. 



64 *THAT: [Par. So. 

Consequently vereor is followed by ne and the Sub- 
junctive. 

I am afraid THAT he will Vereor ne * veniat, i.e. lam 
come anxiously taking mea- 

sures that he may not 
come 

I was afraidTKAT he would Veritus sum ut * veniret, i.e. 
not C07ne I was taking measures 

that he might come 

Rule—' That ' after * I fear ' is rendered by 
* ne/ and ' that not ' by < ut ' ; in both cases 
followed by the Subjunctive. 

SO. That is often omitted, e.g. i I see (that) you under- 
stand.' ' I told him (that) it was so.' The beginner must 
be very careful to detect such omissions and to represent 
the Objective Clause by the Accusative and Infinitive. 

N.B. — Distinguish most carefully the above cases of 
omitted that from the following, ' I heard you sing/ No 
doubt this sentence might occasionally be used for 6 l 
heard (that) you sing/ e.g. ' I heard, from my brother, you 
sing better than ever ' : but, as a rule, it would mean ' I 
heard you singing.' The ambiguity arises from the fact 
that you has no inflection (to distinguish Nom. ' that you 
sing ' from Ace. ' I heard you singing '), and from the loss 
of the Old Eng. Inf. Inflection -en. As the Ace. and Inf. 
are used to represent that, the Latin rule is : — 

Rule — Translate ' I heard her sing' by ' audivi 
illam canentem.' 

Note the greater richness of English in : 
I hear that she sings = Audio illam canere 

{SING =\ 

(in the act of) _ >Audivi illam canentem 
SINGING ) 



See Sequence of Tenses, 64. 



Par. 52.] ' WHETHER^ THE RELATIVE. 65 

51. c Whether/ and 'if,' when introducing an Objective 
or Subjective clause, ( He asked whether, or if, this was 
true, 1 are rendered by (1) utrum, followed by an or ne, 
(2) num, in both cases followed by the Subjunctive. 

N.B. Distinguish between whether thus introducing a 
dependent clause, and whether used to express a con- 
dition, sive. 

He asked whether this Rogavit ntrum hsec vera 
was true or not essent * annon 

Whether this is true or Haec, sive vera sunt seu 
false, I am not troubled falsa, nullo modo me 

by it movent . 

52. The Relative Pronoun is often equivalent to a De- 
monstrative Pronoun combined with some Conjunction 
either Coordinate or Subordinate. Sometimes, as will be 
seen below, it introduces a coordinate, sometimes a sub- 
ordinate clause. The English Relative, whether expressed 
by who or that, is rendered by qui. In English the 
distinction between who and that is as follows : Who 
introduces a new fact about, while that introduces some- 
thing essential to the complete meaning of, the antecedent. 
1 They succeeded in capturing the soldiers (not all, but 
only those) that were wounded, and also the children, who 
(for they) were left behind as an encumbrance.' 

Now, wherever who introduces simply a new fact, with- 
out any notion of cause, purpose, obstacle, &r>c, and 
wherever that introduces simply something essential to 
the completion of the Antecedent, without any notion of 
such a kind that, the Latins, like ourselves, use the 
Relative with the Indicative. But in the exceptional 
cases above mentioned, where not a fact merely but a 
thought is introduced, the Latins, whose language is 
richer than ours in Moods, use the Subjunctive Mood to 
express the thought, as distinguished from the fact, the 
fact being expressed by thelndicative. 

* See Sequence of Tenses, 64. 



mm 



66 



THE RELATIVE PRONOUN. [Par. 52. 



Rule — Wherever the Relative introduces a 
thought, and not merely a fact, it is followed 
by the Latin Subjunctive. 



Some THAT had heard it 
front his own lips 
brought me word of it 



Qui ex ipso audivissent 

certiorem me fecerunt 



Here the Subjunctive denotes not a simple fact, but 
a thought, that the evidence of the class of witnesses 
here described is peculiarly convincing. 

Rule — Since classification implies ' sl 
thought/ the Subjunctive follows ' sunt, 
erant, qui,' ' there are some (such) that.* 



There at'e some that say 
this is not t7'ue 

Caius Ligarius doth bear 
Ccesar hard, WHO * (be- 
cause he) rated him 
for speaking well of 
Pompey 

Balbus is one that (such 
that) has akvays con- 
sulted the interests of his 
country rather than his 
own 

As for you, who (since 
you) have not slept for 
three nights, you are in- 
deed to be pitied 



Sunt qui negrent hsec vera 
esse (so sceptical that) 

Caius Ligarius succenset 
Cassari qui se culpaverit 
quod Pompeium lauda- 
verit (so critical that) 



Balbus is est qui semper rei- 
publicae potius quam sibi 
consuluerit (so patriotic 
that) 



Tu quidem miserrimus, 
qui tertiam jam noctem 
non dormieris (so much 
troubled that) 



* Not ?. common use in modern English. See Shakespearian Grammar 
Paragraph 263. 



Par. 53-] DEPENDENT INTERROGATIVE. 67 

Thei'e is not a soldier, Miles est nemo, qui modo 
WHO (provided that sit homo, qui * non haec 
he) is also a man, perhorrescat (so hard- 
Til AT would not recoil hearted that) 
with horror front such 
a plan 

Qui takes the Subjunctive, even when introducing a 
mere defining sentence, if that sentence is a part of a 
statement or opinion of some one distinct from the writer* 
This is a distinction that cannot be tersely expressed in 
English : 

Socrates used to execrate Socrates exsecrari eum 

the man that was the solebat, qui primus uti- 

first to separate (as litatem a jure sejunxis- 

Socrates said) expe- set 
diency from 7'ight 

Qui also takes the Subjunctive, where the previous construction is such 
as to convey the notion that the Relative Clause does not introduce a fact 
i.e. insubordinate Propositions dependent on clauses con- 
taining Infinitives or Subjunctives. The following are examples : 

// is natural for power to Potentis est facere quod 
be arbitrary (do WHAT // velit 

likes) ^ 

It is easy for yo7i to advise Facile me admones ut me 
me to keep myself in salvum, quoad pcssiiu, 

health SO FAR AS / can servem 



53. The Dependent Interrogative. What requires 
care. Where it means that which, it is to be rendered by 
qucd or id quod, e.g. ' What you say is true/ ' Quod dicis, 
verum est. ; But interrogatively, what ? is rendered by 
quid ? ' quid dicis ? ' And the Latins, with their habitual 
distinction between fact and not fact, not onlychange quod 
into quid, but also change the Indicative into a Subjunc- 
tive, in a dependent Interrogative : 

* When nemo is at some distance from the Relative, quin is sometimes 
replaced by qui non. See Paragraph 55. 

F 2 



68 DEPENDENT INTERROGATIVE. [Par. 54. 

Rule — In dependent interrogatives, e.g. 'I 
ask what you say/ * quid ' must be used, and the 
Verb must be in the Subjunctive, e.g. 'Rogo 
quid dicas.' 



The Latins in many cases prefer the Dependent Inter- 
rogative form to the ordinary Relative. 

I perceived the great kind- Intellexi quanta benevo- 
ness with which / was' lentia hospes me exci- 

received by my host peret 

Do you forget the many Num obliviscimini quotvic- 
victories THAT you have torias reportaveritis ? 

gained? 

N.B. — Do not make the mistake rf writing vic- 
toriarom, as though the Noun were governed by oblivis- 
cor. The Object of obliviscor is, not victorias, but the 
whole of the following sentence. 

Very often the, qualifying the Antecedent, implies great, 
e.g. ' I perceived the kindness with which.' In all such 
cases quantus should be used. See Paragraph 21. 

Rule — When * the,' qualifying an Ante- 
cedent, implies ' great ' or ' many/ ' quantus ' 
or ' quot ' should be used instead of the 
Relative, and should be followed by the 
Subjunctive. 



54. ' That ' after Superlatives. The English often use 
a Superlative preceded by the before the Relative : thus 
' He sent me the most beautiful flowers (of the flowers) 
that he had % ' But in Latin, * Misit ad me pulcerrimos 
flores quos habuit ' might mean * He sent me some very 
beautiful flowers that he had/ To avoid this, the Latins 
place the Superlative in the Relative clause, 'Whatever 
(flowers) he had most beautiful, those flowers he sent/ 
'Quos flores habuit pulcerrimos, eos ad me misit/ or 






Par 55.] ' THAT. . . NOT.' 69 

'Misit ad me flores, quos habuit pulcerrimos.' All is 
transposed in the same way : 

All THAT were captured Qui capti sunt, ii omnes 
were put to death interfecti 

The men that were in the _. qm . r . „„ •' ^ . 
7 ., Si qui > in navi erant. 

s l P Qui ) 

Not homines qui, which might mean some men, who. 

There are other ways of rendering all . . . that : 

They will give up all the Quidquid ) divitiarum su- 
wealth that they have Si quid ) perest, id omne 
remaining tradent 

Note cases where the Relative is implied in English, e.g. 
i The vigour of youth/ by itself, may be rendered vigor 
juvenilis; but 

/ have lost all the vigour Quern quondam juvenis vi- 
qf youth gorem habui, eum om- 

nem perdidi 

Rule — Transpose the Relative in ' the best 
that/ < all that/ < the men that.' 

N.B. — The Relative where used with the Indicative to 
define, often precedes its Antecedent* This may be a trace 
of its interrogative origin. (Shakesp. Gram. Par. 251.) 

55. ' That . . . not/ l but.' When that has for its Ante- 
cedent no one or nothing, and is followed by not, that not 
are often combined in Latin and rendered by quin (qui-ne). 

There was no one that Nemo erat quin fleret 
did NOT weep 

When that is the Object of a Verb, l quern .... non * 
is preferable to ' quin .... eum/ 

There was no one that Nemo erat quern Tullius 
Tullius did not love non amaret 



70 THAT: [Par. 56. 

N.B.--i?#/ meaning except is often used for 'that . . . 
not,' ' There was no one but wept/ i.e. strictly, ' there was 
no one except those that wept.' But seems loosely used as 
a negative Relative, just as as is used as a positive Rela- 
tive in ' Such flowers as* I have, I will give.' In Latin, 
but is rendered by quin or qui . . . non. 

There is no one BUT hates Nemo est quin me oderit 
me 



56. 'That' after repeated Antecedent. When the 
English Antecedent is repeated, or stands, loosely, in ap- 
position to a previous sentence, it is attracted, in Latin, 
into the Relative clause : 

He answered me with the Summa comitate mihi re- 

greatest courtesy — A spondit : cujus comita- 

COURTESYTHAT/ shall tis equidem nunquam 

never f 07 get obliviscar 

He lightened the taxes, A Vecngaiium onera levabat : 
kindness that secured quo beneficio cives con- 

him the favour of his ciliabat 

countryme7i 

N.B. — You may turn sentences of this kind in some 
other way : but you must never render them literally. 



57. ' That ' for l when.' That, after an Antecedent of 
Time, is used for ' on that/ i.e. i on which/ and is there- 
fore equivalent to when. 

On the day THAT (ON Quo die hoc gustaveris 
which, when) thou 
eatest thereof 

When a Negative precedes that thus used, the Relative 
and Negative are often combined and rendered by quin 
(qui, old Abl. ; ne) : 

* Shakespeare writes sometimes 'such which' See page 72, note. 



Par. 59.] RELATIVE CONJUNCTIONS. 71 

Not a day passes that he Dies fere nullus quia hue 
does not come he?'e ventitet 



58. Omission of the Relative. The Relative is often 
omitted in English, when it would come as an Object, just 
between the Antecedent and a following Subject, e.g. 'A 
man (that) I saw yesterday said, &c.' The pupils must 
remember that the Relative is never omitted in Latin 
either in such a sentence as the above, or with Participles, 
as in the following : — 

The soldiers (that were) Quidquid militum in castello 

shut UP in the castle clausum erat, cum iis 

conspired with those conjurabat militibus qui 

(that were) remain- extra oppidum mane- 

ING outside the town bant 

Milites clausi might mean ' the soldiers, or some soldiers, 
being shut up : ' ' iis manentibus ' would mean ' them, 
while remaining, 7 or * those mentioned, who were re- 



59. Relatival Conjunctions. As {in the way, degree 
in which), quam : sometimes demonstrative, in that degree, 
tarn.* 

Balbus is AS (in that DE- Balbus est tarn sapiens 
GREE) wise AS (IN quam ego 

which degree) / am 

Sentences like these might be turned by ' equally,' e.g. 
1 Balbus and I are equally grieved/ or, less logically, 
1 Balbus is equally grieved and I (am equally grieved)/ 
' Balbus seque dolet atque ego.' 

* In * as good as* the first as = so. In Elizabethan English so ... as was 
often used where we use a s . • . as. 

* So well thy words become thee as thy wounds.' 

Macbeth, i. 2. 43. 

This similarity between Demonstratives and Relatives is illustrated by the 
double use of that. 



72 l AS,' 1 LIKE: [Par. 60. 

You ought to have respected Ilium seque (colere debuisti) 
him AS ( you ought to ac patrem colere debu- 

have respected) a father isti 

This is the same thing AS Hoc est idem ac (idem sit) 
asking a question of a si surdum interroges (i.e. 

deaf man and it would be the same) 

As (in the way in which) is also rendered by ut with the 
Indicative, or by eodem mo do quo. 

As you sow, so you must ut seres, ita metes 
reap 

As you please ut libet 

1 shall answer AS you did Ego respondebo eodem 

modo quo tu respondisti 

As in English is sometimes used as a Subject or Object, 
like the Relative Pronoun, e.g. in the two next examples : 

He said the same AS before Eadem quae antea, dixit 

Such help AS * / can give Quod auxilium potero dare, 
you I will dabo 

(Being, or though I am t) Quamvis (to whatever de- 
Old AS / am I will gree) senex, resistam 
resist 



60. * As/ * like/ superlative notion of. As and like are 
often used, without any notion of comparison, to give a 
Superlative meaning, just as little boys say, ' I have such 
a beautiful toy.' The Latins, more logically, express 
this Superlative notion by a Superlative Adjective, or, if 
the meaning is clear without it, they sometimes omit the 
Superlative : 

Who could disbelieve a ?nan Quis Catoni, viro sanctis- 
LIKE Cato f ' simo, fidem non tribuat ? 

* * Such I will have whom I am sure he knows not.' 

All's Well that Ends Well, iii. 6. 14. 

t 'As near the dawning, provost, as it is.' 

Measure for Measure, iv. 2. 97. 






Par. 62.] ' THAN: 73 

// would be monstrous that Quis Gracchos, de seditione 
such men AS the Grac- querentes, tulerit ? 

chi should co77iplain of 
unconstitutional con- 
duct / 

A man LIKE you will al- Tu, cujus es misericordise, 

ways spare the conquered semper victis parces 

We must not desert such a Ricardus, vir fortissimus, 

brave fellow AS Richard nullo modo est deseren- 

dus 

Rule — • Such . . . as,' ' a man like/ must 
often be rendered by the Latin Superlative. 

61. 'Than' expressed by ' quam.' ' Tullius is wiser 
than I,' is to be explained as follows : Than is a form 
of the, the old Relative, meaning in what way, so that 
the above sentence means ' In what way (^whereas) I am 
wise, Tullius is wiser.' So, 'In what way {whereas) you 
helped me, you helped no one more.' The Latin equiva- 
lent for in what way is quam. Hence : 

You helped no one more Nemini plus quam mihi 
THAN me subvenisti 

His gift was greater in Donum dedit specie quam 
appearance than in re majus 

reality 

Rule — When two words are connected in 
the way of comparison by ' quam,' and when 
the Verb is the same in each member of the 
sentence of Comparison, the two words 
stand in the same case. 



62. ' Than ' expressed by the Ablative. Comparison 
may be differently expressed. ' Tallness ; is relative ; a 
man that is not 'tall* (as compared with average men) 
may be made to appear ' taller ' by the presence of 



74 ' THAN: [Par. 63. 

Balbus. Hence Balbus may be considered as the instru- 
ment that makes Tullius ' tall ' ; and the sentence may be 
expressed, ' Tullius is made taller by Balbus] S Tullius 
procerior est Balbo.' But the construction is liable to 
ambiguity, when the first member of the comparison is 
expressed by a Noun that is not in the Nominative or 
Accusative, e.g. ' Donum dedit specie majus re/ t.e. 
'greater than a thing] or, 'greater than in reality? 
Hence : 

Rule — ' Quam ' cannot be replaced by the 
Ablative of the second member of the com- 
parison unless the first member of the com- 
parison is in the Nominative or Accusative. 



63. 'Than/ followed by a new Verb. If the second 
Noun is connected with a different Verb from the first, 
the new Verb is generally inserted, and the second Noun 
put in the necessary case. 

Such conduct would have Talia sapientiori placuis- 
pleased a wiser man sent homini quam tunc 

THAN Balbus was then erat Balbus 

When the first Noun is in the Accusative, the new Verb is sometimes 
omitted, and the second Noun is attracted into the same case as the first, 
e 'S- ' Ego hominem callidiorem vidi neminem quam XSaibuxn.' 

If the instrumental force of the Ablative is kept in mind, 
the reason for the following caution will be evident : 

N.B. — Take care not to use the Ablative instead of 
'quam' where the Adjective does not qualify either 
member of the comparison, e.g. ' He has a taller horse 
than I.' Here ' P cannot be regarded as the instrument 
of comparison ; it: is not '// but ' my horse ' that makes 
his horse appear taller. Hence : 



He has a taller} I Equum habet altiorem 

J MINE ( (I) quau 

\ (2) meo 



horse than J MINE j (1) quam ego (habeo) 



Par. 64.] 



SEQUENCE OF TENSES. 



IS 



' More than a hundred' might be rendered by i a httn- 
dred and more' This construction is common in Latin, 
and in it the comparison does not affect the case of the 
Numeral Adjective. Fins in plusquam (as well as am- 
plius) is thus adverbially used. 

More than two hundred Ducenti (et) amplius capti 
were captured sunt 

/ see the names of MORE Nomina video plus quam 
THAN five hundred of quingentorum civium 

my countryinen 

64. Sequence of Tenses. Before entering on the other 
Subordinate Conjunctions, it will be well to explain the 
rule that will regulate the Tenses following these Con- 
junctions. In subordinate sentences the Tense of the 
subordinate Latin Verb is dependent on the Tense of the 
principal Verb, e.g. : 



n 



1 



am making 

make 

have made 

have * been making 

shall, will be making 

shall, will make 

shall have made 

a request that HE MAY 

BE PARDONED 

was making } 

Tf J \ a request 

had made i * 

had* been making ) 

that he MIGHT BE PAR- 
DONED 



Rogo 

Rosavl >ut illi 

Rogabo 

Rogavero 
ignoscatnr 



Rogabam 
Rogavi 

Rogaveram 
ignosceretnr 



ut illi 



So far, the Rule in Latin is evident. Like follows Like. 
The Future and Present Tenses (for rogavi, when mean- 
ing ' I have asked/ means ' I have something asked,' and 
is therefore a Complete Present Tense) are followed by 



See Paragraph 11. 



7 6 



SEQUENCE OF TENSES. 



[Par. 64. 



the Present Subjunctive, and the Past Tenses by the 
Past Subjunctive. Of course, in an English dependent 
sentence, e.g. in a sentence following ' I ask whether/ we 
use, according to the sense, is, was, or has beeiu But now 
note the Latin equivalent : 



I< 



am asking 

ask 

have asked 

have been asking 

shall be asking 

shall ask 

shall have asked 



Rogo 

Rogavi 

Rogabo 
Rogavero 



) utrum 



adsit 



whether he 



( was asking 



is present 

1.Z LTfiresent \ adfuerit RB - 



Rogabam 
Rogavi 

Rogaveram 



1 asked 

\ had asked 

( had been asking 

( is present (now) 
whether he < was present (yesterday) 
( had been present 



utrum 



adesset 
adfuisset 



N.B. — Note that above, ' whether he zvas present' and 
' whether he has been present '/ are both expressed in Latin 
by ' utrum adfaerit.' This is a necessary and inconvenient 
consequence of the Latin Law of Sequence, which is 
so strict that it sometimes produces great ambiguity. 
Thus : 



/ have asked whether he 

CAME 



Rogavi utrum venerii 



Here it is impossible to tell from the Latin, whether he 
came, or he has come, is the correct translation. But 
the Latins cannot help this. If they had written veniret 
above, ' rogavi utrum veniret/ then, since rogavi means 
both / asked and I have asked, we should naturally render 



Par. 66.] SUBORDINATE CONJUNCTIONS. 77 

the sentence, not ' I have asked whether he came/ but c / 
asked whether he came.' This is a serious deficiency arising 
from the poverty of the Latin language in respect of lenses : 
for they have nothing but rogavi to render our two tenses, 
asked and have asked. 

I will ask why he CAME Interrogabo cur venerit 

Don't you know the esteem in Nescisne quanto in h on ore 
which HE WAS HELD ? fuerit ? 

Apparent exception to Sequence of Tenses. In a conditional 

sentence ' if I had come, what would you have done ? ' the Pluperfect Sub- 
junctive is used in both cases ; and, even when the sentence depends upon a 
Present Tense ' I know,' the Pluperfect in the Protasis 'si venissem' is 
retained. For the Tense depends upon the nature of the condition, and not 
on the tense of the Principal Verb. But the Pluperfect in the Apodosis is 
changed., according to the Rule of Sequence, ' Scio quid facturus f ueris 
si venissem,' ' I know what you would have done, if I had come,' where the 
condition is expressed by the Future Participle. 

65. Subordinate Conjunctions. (1) time : after {that), 
before (that), now that, since, until, when, while ; (2) cir- 
cumstance : whereas, while; (3) reason: as, in that, 
because, inasmuch as, seeing that ; (4) condition : if, pro- 
vided that, supposing, whether, although, however, unless ; 

(5) result : so as, so that, in such a way, manner, &*c. that; 

(6) purpose : in order that, so that, to the intent that, lest. 
The above list includes only those of the Prepositional 

Conjunctions that are followed by a Subject and a Tense 
of the Verb, e.g. ' before he came/ But practically many 
other Prepositions are Conjunctions though only used 
with Verbals or (in the case of to) with an Infinitive : 
(1) circumstance : besides, instead of without; (2) instru- 
ment : by, of ; (3) reason, cause : for, on ; (4) condition , 
in spite ofj (5) purpose : to, from, 

66. Time. It will be seen that the Latins are forced to 
supply their weakness in Prepositional and other Con- 
junctions, and also in Verbals, by using their strength in 
Moods. In this way the same Conjunction, e.g. quum, 
may be used, (1) to denote time with the Indicative, (2) 



78 CONJUNCTIONS OF TIME. [Par. 66 

to denote thought (whether it be (i) cause, 'since/ or (2) sue- 
cession, with notion of consequence 'upon/ or (3) contrast, 
' though/ ' whereas ') with the Subjunctive. 

Since this is so, what in Quae quum ita sint, quid- 
the world will you do t nam facies ? 

When / used to live at Quum Athenis agebam, 
Athens ', I used to attend Balbum audiebam 

Balbus 1 lectures 

N.B. — In narrating the past, when we mention one 
event as occurring simultaneously with the occurrence or 
completion of another event, we generally imply some 
further connection than at the time when, e.g. * when he 
heard this, he fled.' Here there is a thought, viz. that 
the flight was a co?iseque?tce of hearing. Such a sentence 
would be rendered in Latin ' Quae quum audivisset.' 

Rule — ' Quum ' with the Imperfect and 
Pluperfect generally takes the Subjunctive. 

After (that), postquam. In English when we use after 
for when, we generally desire to express that the first 
action is completed before the second begins, e.g. ' when 
he heard me/ but ' after he had heard me/ The Latins, 
on the contrary, generally use, in this sense, the Pluperf. 
Subj. with quum, and the Perf. Ind. with postquam. 

Rule — ' Postquam ' takes the Perfect, un- 
less the interval is expressed or emphatically 
implied. 

AFTER the rebellion HAD Postquam seditio compres- 
BEEN PUT DOWN he re- sa est Romam rediit 

turned to Rome 

Te?i years AFTER the rebel- Decimo anno postquam se- 
lion HAD BEEN put ditio compressa erat, 

down, he &*& &c. 

As (1) postquam is generally used of time without ex- 
pressing thought, it is followed by the Indicative. Else, use 



Par. 66.] CONJUNCTIONS OF TIME. 79 

(2) quran with Subjunctive, or (3) the Ablative Absolute,* 
'seditione compressa/ or (4) post governing a Noun 
qualified by a Participle or by some word used as a 
Participle, i post seditionem compressam/ l post Tullinm 



Before (that), antequam, priusquam, donee (like post- 
qaam) take the Perfect where we often use the Pluperfect. 
But they differ from postquam in that they are often used 
with the Subjunctive to imply ' thought ' as well as se- 
quence. 

Rule — * Antequam,' « priusquam/ * dum,' 
'donee,' and 'quoad,' are followed by the 
Subjunctive when design is implied, or when 
an action is referred to that has not actually 
commenced. 

They retired (on puypose) Ante sese receperunt quam 
BEFORE the city was urbs caperetur 

(could be) captured 

Note also the logical use of the Future in Latin 
(see Paragraph 11) : 

BEFORE / see you Antequam te videbo or vi- 

dero 

Before is sometimes expressed by an Ablative Absolute 
with nondum, e.g. i nondum urbe condita,' or by ante 
governing a Noun qualified by a Participle, ' ante urbem 
conditam.' The following sentences illustrate the Latin 
rendering of English Conjunctions of time : — 

Now THAT he had ar?'ived Turn vero adoIescens,qumn 
at Rome the young man Romam venisset, omnia 

felt sure of success spe praesumebat (Notion 

of cause) 

* The Ablative, denoting some circumstance , something with which an 
action takes place, seems naturally used in this way. 



8o 



CONJUNCTIONS OF TIME. 



[Par. 66. 



Since we began our jour- 
ney we have not seen 
a man 

Since we began our jour- 
ney we have seen two 
hundred men 

Until / (fact) came to 
Rome, I thought every 
Roman a knave 



Until / (possibility) am 
deceived, I shall treat 
him as though he were 
honest 

I shall NOT believe you 
UNTIL you keep your 
word 



Ex quo tempore profecti 
snmus ne unum quidem 
hominem vidimus 

Postquam profecti sumus, 
homines ducentos vidi- 
mus 

Donee {or antequam) Ro- 

mam veni, Romanos 
omnes veteratores esse 
duxi 

Hominem, donee me dece- 
perit, tanquam probum 
habebo 



Quum promissa servabis, 
turn demum tibi credam 






When, see the beginning of the Paragraph. 



While this was going on, 
the enemy fled 

While heading a charge, 
he fell 



Dum hasc geruntur (not 
gerebantur) hostes ter- 
ga dederunt (Par. n) 

Dum pugnam princeps 
ciet, occidit. (Or ciens 
rarely ; but never dum 
ciens. See Par. 70.) 

The sequence of events is sometimes expressed in 
English by the Present Participle of the Verb have. 
1 Having finished this, i.e. having this finished, I shall 
return/ This is rendered in Latin by the Pass. Part. 
Abl. Absolute, ' his auditis/ or by a Conjunction. 

N.B. — With Intransitive Verbs, the Ablative Absolute 
cannot be used : 'Having now settled here, I don't in- 
tend to move.' 'Quoniam hie jam consedi, rmgrare 
nolo.' 



Par. 68.] CONJUNCTIONS OF REASON. 8r 

None but the Deponent Participles can render the 
English Participle with having, e.g. ' having said this he 
departed/ ' haec locutus abiit.' 

Examples : Adeptus, amplexus, arbitratus, ausus. exper- 
tus, functus, bortatus, mortuus, nactus, oblitus, ortus, 

passusj quesrtus, rat us, solitus, testatus, ultus, usus. 

67. Conjunctions of circumstance. 

We say vi7'tue is the chief Virtutem nos quidem, vos 

object of life, whereas autem voluptatem sum- 

or WHILE you say plea- mum bonum esse dicitis 
sure is 

N.B. — Distinguish this use of while from the temporal 
use. Autem is often omitted. 

// is unjust that this should Injustum est hoc vobis con- 
be granted to you while cedi, negari nobis 

it is refused to us 

68. Conjunctions of reason are followed by the In- 
dicative, if prominence is given to the truth of the fact 
on which some statement is based. 

As you have promised, you Tu, quoniam promisisti, 
must keep your word fidem prsestare debes 

In THAT you did it know- Quod (or Tu qui) sciens 

ingly, your C7'ime is fecisti, gravius quam 

woi'se than that of the ceteri, peccavisti 
rest 

N.B. — When we put not before because, the Verb 
following not because very often expresses something that 
is not vjfact. Hence : 

/ do this, not BECAUSE its Hoc facio, non quod ju- 
pleasant, but BECAUSE cundum sit, sed quia 

it's right hone stum est 

But, even where fact is expressed, the Subjunctive is 
used, if there is a thought, e.g. of cause : 

G 



82 



CONJUNCTIONS OF CONDITION. [Par. 69. 



Inasmuch as (seeing 
that, since) you do 
not pity us, you cannot 
expect us to pity you 

I ought to be grateful INAS- 
MUCH AS / have re- 
ceived many benefits 
from him 

Since this is so, why do we 
delay t 



Tu, qnum {or qui) nostri 
non miserearis, non 
sperare debes fore ut 
tui misereamur. 

Debeo gratus esse, ut qui 
multa ab illo beneficia 
aeceperim 



Quae quum ita sint, cur 

moramur ? 



69. Conjunctions of condition. 

In a language that, like Latin, has distinct Moods 
to denote fact and not fact, si, when followed by the 
Present or Past Tense of the Indicative, loses the exact 
notion of condition, and must mean either (1) when, as in 
1 si quando vidit ' or (2) ' assuming, for a moment, as a 
fact/ e.g. ' Si nihil aliud feceruut, satis praemii habent.' 
So ' si Deus mundum creavit,' ' assuming that God created 
the world.' 

This (2) use of the Indicative leaves it an open question 
whether, in the writer's opinion, the Verb expresses 2ifact 
or not. The Subjunctive distinctly expresses what is not 
fact, though it may be hereafter fact : that is to say, the 
Subjunctive after si expresses what is genuinely, and the 
Indicative Past and Present after si what is fictitiously, 
conditional. 

The following are genuine conditional sentences : — 

If* / (shall find that I) Si quid habebo,dabo. (Note 



have anything, I will 
give it 



the English weakness, 
have being used both 
for Future and Present) 

Si quid habeani; dem 



Should I have {or, if I were 
to have, or, if I had, 
which is possible) any- 
thing, I would give it 

* If'\VL * I don't know if means whether. See 53. 



Par. 69.] CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 83 

IF / had anything {which Si quid haberem, darexn 
/ have not, and cannot 
have) I would give it 

IF I had had anything, I Si quid habuissem, dedis- 

would have given it sem. (Or, graphically, 

dederam) 

Rule — In conditional sentences, ■ si ' with 
the Past Tenses of the Subjunctive is used 
to denote an impossible, * si ' with the Pre- 
sent Tenses, to denote a possible, condition. 

Sometimes the thought is changed from sequence to 
consequence, in which case the Verb is changed in the 
Apodosis,* from the Future to the Present Subjunctive, 
e.g ' Si quid habebo, dem,' ' if I have anything, I will, 
or rather, I would, give it' But this is not common ex- 
cept in silver Latin. And : 

Rule — The Subjunctives in the Protasis 
and the Apodosis, must be both Present or 
both Past.f 

If not : see Paragraph 70. 

You will succeed, PROVI- Rem perficies dummodo (or 
DED THAT you do your modo si or modo) pro 

best virili agas 

SUPPOSING / have a dagger, Fac me sicam habere; non 
it does not follow that sum continuo sicarius 

I'm an assassin (or Etiam si sicam ha- 

beo, assuming- it as a 

fact) 

A condition can also be expressed by a Participle or 
Ablative Absolute, provided there is no ambiguity. 

* The ' if clause is called the Antecedent or Protasis ; the clause contain- 
ing the consequence is called the Consequent or Apodosis. 

t The Impel feet may correspond to the Pluperfect), eg. *tu, si mihi 
paruisses, non nunc Romse esses ' : but you could not have ' pareas 3 
esses.' 'pareres, sis.' 

G 2 



84 ' THOUGH: [Par. 69. 

If you take the city in three Quid igitur deinde fades, 
months, what will you urbe tribus his mensibus 

do then ? capta ? 

But if ' tribus his mensibus ' were removed, the mean- 
ing might be i since you have taken the city.' 

Though (O.E. theaJi) is connected with the, that; and 
calls attention to a condition or circumstance ' even in 
the (case that).' The close connection between the 
Demonstrative and Relative {the was once the English 
Relative, as that now is) makes it not surprising that 
though, i.e. in-the, or al-though, i.e. eve7i in the, should be 
rendered in Latin by quanquam (quam-quam), or quam- 
vis, both emphatic forms of quam, in the way in which, or 
in what way. Quanquam often refers to facts, i quanquam 
iratus est/ ' although he is angry ; ' quamvis (in the best 
prose) j means however much, and does not refer to a 
definite fact. Hence j . 

Rule — ' Quanquam ' generally takes the 
Indicative, ' quamvis ' never (in good Prose). 

Rule — c Quamvis ' is often used with Ad- 
jectives, without a Verb : 

Pray be silent, however Quamvis iratus, cura ut 
a7igry you may be taceas 

Though often implies that something does not exist in 
the way in which it might be expected to. Hence : 

THOUGH he is brave, hes Homo est, ut fortis, ita non 
not very clever admodum acutus (In 

the way wherein, or 
whereas, he's brave, &*c ) 

The same sentence might be expressed thus, ' He is 
brave, but in such a way that he's not clever/ ' Ita fortis 
est ut tamen non acutus sit.' 

Though this is useful, it is Hoc est ita utile ut hones- 
not right turn non sit 



Far. 69.] • UNLESS,' ' WHETHER: 85 

Though, used parenthetically for yet, but, is quanquam. 

THOUGH, why do I waste Quanquam, cur querendo 
time in complai7iin% f tempus tero ? 

Unless, if ... . not, nisi : rarely si non, unless the si 
and non are separated. Nisi follows the same rule as si. 
See above. 

1 Not .... unless' is sometimes represented in Latin 
by ' ita .... si/ i.e. ' only on this condition ....if.' 

I shall not forgive you UN- Ego, hac lege {or ita) tibi, 
LESS you forgive him si tu ill'i, ignoveris 

Unless you agree in your Quod si eadem velitis, turn 
wishes, you cannot be demum amicitiam possi- 

f7'iends tis conjungere. (Theii 

a7id not till then) 

Whether {which of t%vd) is often equivalent in English 
to if on the one hand. ' Whether (i.e. whichever of two 
things we do) we rejoice or sorrow, we shall always re- 
member you/ This is rendered in Latin by sive, if either, 
6 Nos, sive gaudebimus, sive (or seu) dolebimus, tui 
nunquam obliviscemur.' 

N.B. — Carefully distinguish between whether meaning 
whichever of two things, sive, and whether following a 
Verb, e.g. ' he asked/ and meaning which of two things, 
i.e. utrom. (See Paragraph 51.) 

The principal danger of confusing the two meanings of •whether is, when 
•whether means sive, but is placed after the principal sentence, e.g. ( I am 
not much annoyed, whether this be true or false.' 

N.B. — Note here that, though in English we sometimes 
use be after whether, the Latins, as in the last example, 
use the Indicative. The reason is that nothing is implied 
as to the possible incorrectness of the suppositions : the 
meaning is * assuming it to be true, or assuming it to be 
false, and Pm not just now concerned with the question 
whether it is true or false.' 



86 ■ WHEN A BOY? [Par. 70. 

70. English Ellipsis of Verb after Conjunctions. We 

have seen that quamvis can be used Adverbially to 
qualify an Adjective or Participle. In English a great 
number of Conjunctions are thus used, i while walking ' for 
1 while he was walking.' So, * when young,' * though 
hot-tempered/ ' if true/ This ellipsis is rare in Latin. 
Insert the Verb, e.g. 'when he was young/ or turn the 
sentence by an. appositional Noun, or by a qualifying 
Participle, or otherwise : 

WHILE WALKING he fell Ambulans, dum ambulat, 

cecidit 

WHEN A BOY Balbus was Balbus puer Athenas mis- 
sent to Athens sus est 

He is frivolous, if NOT Homo levis est, nedum {or 

immoral ne dicam) improbus 

v 

71. Conjunctions of result. Even in English we some- 
times express result (even though it is a fact) not as a fact, 
but as a consequence, in the Infinitive. ' The walls were 
so battered as to be no longer tenable.' The Latins, 
having their Subjunctive, express a result by that Mood, 
preceded by ut, in which way, quut, quo(d), old Abl. of 
qui. Sometimes ut is preceded by ita, in that way. 

N.B. — This construction* is used even after verbs of 
happening, the notion perhaps being *' things happened in 
such a way that, &*c.' e.g. s It happened once that the 
house was set on fire.' ' Forte accidit ut asdes incen- 



72. Conjunctions of purpose. Purpose is expressed in 
Latin by (1) ut with the Subjunctive, (2) ad with the 
Gerund or Gerundive, and, more rarely, (3) causa pre- 
ceded by the Gerund or Gerundive, and (4) the Fut. 
Part. Active; also, after Verbs of Motion by (5) the 
Supine, e.g. ' venio visum urbem,' where visum is really 
a Verbal Noun placed in the Ace. after venio (like 
rus, domum), and itself governing an Accusative. 

* When using it, observe the Sequence of Tenses, 64. 



Par. fo.] CONJUNCTIONS OF PURPOSE. 87 

N.B. — In Construction (1), which is by far the most 
common, be careful to observe the Sequence of Tenses. 

/ have come THAT / may Veni (1) ut capiam, (2) ad 
take the city capiendam, (3) capiendi 

causa, (4) capturus, 
(5) cap turn, urbem 

We have seen above (Paragraph 45) that the Latins 
like to give prominence to a Negative, e.g. nisi for if . . • 
not. In the same way: 

Rule — ' That . . . not ' denoting purpose is 
generally represented by ' ne,' or more rarely 
' ut . . . ne ' : and so, instead of ' ut nemo,' 
you should write ' ne quis ' ; instead of ' ut 
nunquam,' ' ne quando.'* 

O that! is rendered in Latin by utinam, ' (I desire) 
that indeed, &c. ? e.g. ' utinam veniat/ ; (I desire) that he 
may indeed come.' Wishes about the past are useless. 
Hence 

Rule — ' Utinam ' with the Present Sub- 
junctive introduces wishes that can be, with 
the Past Subjunctive, wishes that cannot be, 
realized. 



73. ' To,' various meanings of. To presents many 
difficulties to the beginner. Take for example, ' I eat to 
live/ Here ' to live ; is not a Present Infinitive by deri- 
vation. It used to be ' to livene/ where to meant toward, 
and livene (living) was a Gerund, e.g. i I eat to live' = 
i I eat toward living! Hence : 

Rule — Whenever 6 to ' before a verb de- 
notes purpose, it is not to be translated by 
the Latin Infinitive. 

This applies only to that followed by may, might, and denoting purpose 



83 TO.' [Par. 73. 

C Vivendi causa 
/ eat TO LIVE Vescor < ut vivam 

\ ad viyendum 

/ come TO SEE Venio \ v ^ snm 

( visurus 

When therefore is to live to be rendered vivere ? Only 
when * to live is really a Noun and means living, as : 

/ should like TO LIVE Velim vivere 

To LIVE is pleasant Vivere jucundum est 

Now take ' I promise to come.' That means ' I promise 
coming.' Yes, but the coming is future ; and though we 
have no Future Participle, the Latins have, and can say 
1 1 promise myself to be about to come? 

Rule — After ' I hope/ * I promise/ turn 
* to ' by the Latin Future Participle Active. 



/ promise, hope, to come Promitto, spero, me ven- 

turum 

C Statuo, in animo mihi est, 
/ determine, propose, to j venire 

come ) But also, Constituo me 

' venturum 

N.B. — ' I hope that it is so ? = ' spero rem ita se habere.' 

Sometimes, where to conveys to our ears no distinct 
notion of purpose, nor of consequence, the Latins seem to 
find the notion : 

I determine TO (in SUCH A Constituo ut veniam 
WAY that I may) come 

* Here the to is redundant, improperly added as the sign of the Inf. To, 
in Early English, was used like ad in Latin, before the Gerund. The simi- 
larity of the Inf. liven to the Gerund livene (which was a Dative form) 
caused the two to be confused ; and, inflections being lost, the to was impro- 
perly transferred' to the Inf., even when there was no notion of purpose. 



Par. 73-] l T0: 89 

TJu best kind of worship is Cultus deorum optimus est 

TO worship {such that ut eos pura mente vene- 

we worship) God with remur 
purity of mind 

It is the way with men TO Mos est hominum ut 
envy their superiors superioribus invideant. 

(Their custom is such 

that, &>c.) 

1 1 happened to see him ' seems to be a confusion be- 
tween ' I happened, happed, or lighted on seeing him/ and 
1 it happened to me to see him.' The Latins use the latter 
construction with ut, ' contigit mini ut hominem viderem.' 

Rule— Use ' ut ' after ' contingit,' < accidit,' 
'evenit,' 'fit,' &c. 

N.B. — After verbs of asking, commanding, advising, 
and striving, to is rendered by ut with the Subjunc- 
tive. It is easy to see that, in i I command you to go/ to 
go may be regarded as independent of what precedes, and 
as equivalent to ' in order that you may go/ l impero tibi 
ut eas ' ; or else you-to-go may be regarded as an Objec- 
tive clause, 'your going,' after* / command/ 'jubeo te 
ire.' Hence: 

Rule— 

With ask, command, advise and strive, 
By ut translate Infinitive ; 
But not so after jubeo, nor 
After the Verb Deponent conor. 

To after an Adjective modified by enough, e.g. not 
good enough, or after fit, worthy, conveys a notion of 
purpose or result, and may therefore be rendered by ut 
or by qui (i.e. ut is) with the Subjunctive. 

He is not fit for you TO Non dignus est quocum 
converse with (i.e. ut cum eo) collo- 

quaris 



90 ■' TO: [Par. 73. 

The Adjective is sometimes implied in the : 

Iamnott he (suitable) man Non is sum qui (ut ego) 
TO commit such a fault hanc culpam admittam 

To denoting purpose and following the Object * of a 
Transitive Verb, is often rendered by the Relative fol- 
lowed by the Subjunctive. 

/ sent men TO ask for Misi (homines) qui (z\e. ut 
peace ii) pacem peterent 

To after too is expressed, in Latin, by a periphrasis. 
1 He is too kind to hate ' means 'for the purpose of 
hating, he is too kind/ But the expression is slovenly 
and liable to ambiguity. What is the meaning of : 

' Too fond to rule alone ' ? — PoPE.t 

It might mean ' too foolishly affectionate to rule alone/ 
but it is intended to mean ' too fond of ruling.' To 
avoid the ambiguity that might attend such sentences 
as ' nimis clemens est ut irascatur or ad irascendum/ the 
Latins say, ' he is kinder than that he could (or, than a 
man that could) be angry.' * Clementior est quam ut or 
quaxn qui possit odisse.' 

They came too late TO be of Serius advenere quam qui 
a7iy tise possent prodesse 

To often means ' as regards 1 % in (1) ' He was the first 
to, (2) ' I am glad to/ l I am sorry to,' &c. In (1) Is, was, 
&c. is inserted for emphasis in English, but is not required 
in Latin. In (2) to is rendered by quod, or sometimes, as 

* The Object is sometimes understood in Latin. 

t Compare 

' but, for a calm unfit, 
Would steer too nigh the sands to boast his wit.' 

Dryden. 
J ' To sue to live, I find I seek to die, 

And seeking death find life.' 

Measure for Measure % iii. x. 43. 

Here, to sue means in suing, and corresponds to seeking.— Shakespearian 
Grammar, Paragraph 357. 



Par. 74.] 



PRESENT PARTICIPLE, 



91 



in (1), the English Infinitive becomes the Latin principal 
Verb. 



Cato was the fi,7 r st TO speak 
I was glad TO find that 

you were in good 

health 



Cato primus dixit 
Gaudebam quod te intellexi 

bene valere, or, libeuter 

intellexi 



To also means as regards or in, after shameful, wo?ide?'- 
ful, incredible y easy, pleasaiit, honourable, and is sometimes 
rendered by the so-called Passive Supine, e.g. l mirabile 
dictu/ ' wonderful z>/-the-saying.' 

Dictu, factu, gus'tatu, auditu, cognitu, visu, inventu, 

and others are thus used. 



74. The English Present Participle often expresses 
more than mere simultaneousness, and therefore can- 
not often be rendered by the Latin Present Participle. 
It often implies some Conjunction ; but what Conjunction 
is implied, it is not always easy to determine. The loose 
and ambiguous use of the Present Participle is a delect in 
English. 

N.B. — The meaning of the Participle must be deter- 
mined by the context. When the Principal Verb is in 
the Past or Present Tense, the Participle often means 
'although' or 'since' ; when the Principal Verb is in. the 
Future Tense, the Participle often means 'if.' This also 
applies to Verbals preceded by Prepositions : see Par. 75. 

Knowing (since you Quae quum scias cur plura 
know) this, why do you quaeris ? 

ask more questions t 

Knowing (although he 
knew) that it had been 
forbidden, he neverthe- 
less ventured to come 

Finding (as soon as, or, 
IF he finds) that he Is 
unwelcome, he will 
return 



Quamvis sciret id vetitum 
esse, ausus est tamen 
venire 

Hie simul atque {or si 
medo) inteilexerit se 
haud expectatum venire, 
redibit 



92 VERBALS. [Par. 75. 

Sciens would mean simply ' in the state of knowing/ or" 
1 at the time of knowing/ 

The Relative is often to be supplied before a Participle 
in English, e.g. 'the soldiers (that were) remaining in the 
town, as well'as those (that were) encamped outside.' This 
Relative must be expressed in Latin. (See Par. 58.) 

75. The English Verbal gives great flexibility to our 
language. It is a great advantage to be able, by merely 
affixing -ing, to construct an abstract Noun out of any 
Verb. The English Verbals have very few corresponding 
Latin Verbals, e.g. tactus, touching; audit us, equitatio 
(Pliny). 

When the English Verbal is the Subject or Object, it 
is often equivalent to an Infinitive : 

Walking is healthier; but Quamvis ambuiare mihi 
I prefer RIDING plus prosit, malo tamen 

e quit are 

We cannot say (though Shakespeare could), ' the taking 
a city/ Why not ? Because the, to our ears, converts the 
Verbal into a mere Noun, requiring of after it. In the 
same way the Latins could not say ' venio ad visum urbem/ 
because the ad made visum too much like a Noun. They 
therefore omitted ad. For the same reason they did not 
like to say * ad videndum urbem.' But in this case, instead 
of omitting ad to retain the Verbal force of videndum, 
they retain ad and change videndum into the Adjective 
videndam. 

When the Gerund is governed, not by a Preposition, 
but by a Noun, eg. ' consilium videndi,' the Genitive 
(which may be either Possessive or Objective) does not, 
like a Preposition, Nounify the Gerund so as to prevent 
it f~om having its Verbal force. We can therefore write 
either ' urbem videndi, or urbis videndee consilium.' 

Rule — After Prepositions, if the Verb has 
an Object, use the Gerundive and not the 
Gerund, e.g. 'in victore (not -ern) laudando.' 



Par. 75-] 



VERBALS. 



93 



The Gerund (or Gerundive, if combined with a Substan- 
tive) follows ad, for j de, concerning; in, in ; ob, on ac- 
coitnt of j rarely inter, and other Prepositions. 

Note the different renderings of the same Preposition 
and Verbal, varying with the difference of Tense in the 
principal Verb. 



Verbals after Prepositions. 

I have no doubt ABOUT your 

RECOVERING 

Write to him about par- 
doning the prisoners 

As TO forgiving him, I 
shall do 710 such thing 

I am surprised AT your 

OBJECTING 

He's clever AT FINDING 
weak points 

Besides singing she can 

dance 

What do you mean BY 

THREATENING me t 

BY EREAKING down the 

bridge, he cut off the 
supplies of the enemy 

BY GETTING up early, I ex- 
pect to finish my wo?'k 



One gains style BY READING 
speeches and poems 



Non dubito quin futurum 
sit ut convalescas 

Fac scribas homini de venia 
captivis danda 

Quod me rogas (rogant) ut 
ignoscam homini, omni- 
no non faciam 

Miror quod adversaris 

Satis acutus est in investi- 
gandis erroribus 

Mulier non solum canit sed 
edam saltare didicit 

Quid vis quod mihi hasc 
minaris ? 

Ponte rescisso hostem a 
commeatu interclusit 

Si prima luce surrexero, 
spero me opus perfectu- 
rum 

Elegantia loquendi legen- 
dis oratoribus et poet is 



BY PERSEVERING he WO?l 

During the building of 
the bridge 



Perseverando vicit 
Inter faciendum pontem 



94 



VERBALS. 



[Par. 75. 



/ shall punish you FOR 
doing this 

Socrates was conde7nned 

FOR CORRUPTING, SO 

people said, the young 
men 

You have no cause FOR 

COMPLAINING 

The ram was useful FOR 

BATTERING down the 

wall 

It's a shame to take money 
FOR giving a ve?'dict 

I was deterred by him FROM 
COMING 

From equivocating you 
will come TO LYING 

Hoping is very different 

FROM BELIEVING 

In keeping your word you 
will be consulting your 
brother's i?iterests 

You are late IN COMING 

IN doing this I have no 
object but the good of 
the country 

Virtue is manifested IN 
despising pleasure 

In blaming him you blame 
me 

I am IN FAVOUR OF RE- 
TREATING 



Te, qui hoc feceris, poena 
afficiam 

Socrates damnatus est quod 
juventutem corrumperet 
(Subjunctive expresses 
' so people said ') 

Non habes cur queraris 

Aries utilis erat ad muros 
c onquassandos 

Turpe est pecuniam ob rem 
judicandam accipere 

Hie me quominus venirem 

deterruit 

Tergiversatus mox men- 

tieris 
Tergiversatio mendacii 

parens 

Sperare aliud, aliud et dis- 
simillimum est credere 

Si fidem prsestiteris \ fratri 
Fidem praestando J con- 
sules 

Sero venis 

Quod autem hoc facio nul- 
lam. habeo causam prse- 
ter rei-publicae commo- 
dum 

In contemnenda voluptate 
virtus cernitur 

Quum ilium culpas, me 
quoque culpas 

Equidem recedendum esse 
censeo 



Par. 75.] 



VERBALS, 



95 



Instead of crying you 



laugh 



Instead of crying, work 

This comes OF helping 
you 

I am tired OF hearing 
the same thi?ig a thou- 
sand ti7iies 

The idea OF your ever im- 
proving ! 

/ despair OF FINDING it 



On hearing 
blushed 



this he 



What will you do 
hearing this t 



ON 



He is bent ON MAKING 
money 

Since hearing from you 
I found that I was mis- 
taken 

Since setting out from 
home, I he 

one letter 



home, I have not received 



He failed THROUGH AT- 
TEMPTING too much 

No one ever sees him WITH- 
OUT calling him a trai- 
tor 



ITantum abest ut lacrime- 
ris, ut rideas 
Rides quum debeas lacri- 
mari 

Age, o mis sis lacrymis, ten- 
ta quid possis 

Quod tibi sub venire volui 

hunc habeo fructum 

Taedet me eadem milliens 
audire 

Tu ut unquam te corrigas ! 
(i.e. to suppose that, &C.) 

Despero me id reperturum 
esse 

His auditis ) eru- 

Quae quum audivisset ) buit 

| Qu^siinteUex-, idtan _ 

Q . •"■ fc idem fa- 
Simulatquensec / cies ? 

' intellexeris ) 

Attentus est ad divitias 
ac c umulandas 

Postquam tuas literas acce- 
pi, intellexi me errorem 
fecisse 

Litteras, ex quo tempore 
domo profectus sum, 

ne singulas quidem ac- 
cepi 

Ne modica quidem tenuit, 
quia ad altiora tendebat 

Nemo ilium unquam adspi- 
cit qum proditorem 
compeilet 



9 6 



VERBALS. 



[Par. 76. 



He speaks well without 
PERSUADING anybody 

You will make mischief 
WITHOUT meaning it 

I shotrid not have come here 
without obtaining a 
safe conduct 

He was condemned WITH- 
OUT BEING heard 

Without openly accusing 
M711 you insinuate char- 
ges against him 

We returned WITHOUT EF- 
FECTING a?iy thing 

N.B. — The Gerundive, eg. ferendum, means, in Cicero, 
* that which is to be, ought to be, borne.' In later writers, 
it sometimes means 'that which may be, can be, borne.' 
But, when preceded by non or vix, ferendum is used even 
by Cicero, to mean bearable, tolerable. 



Bene loquitur, neque tamen 
cuiquam persuadet 

Quamvis imprudens, certa- 
mina seres 

Quod nisi mihi hostis fidem 
dedisset tuto me reditu- 
rum, nunquam hue ve- 
nissem 

inauditus damnatus est 

Ita hominem non accusas 
ut tamen operte insimu- 
les 

Re infecta, rediimus 



76. The Subject of the principal Verb, in a sentence 
containing a subordinate sentence, should often come first 
in Latin, where it does not come first in English : 



When Themistocles had 
secured the safety of 
Greece by the destruction 
of the Persian fleet, he 
wrote a letter to Xerxes 

Thus the clumsy repetition of he is avoided. 



Themistocles, postquam, 
Persarum classe deleta, 
Graeciam servavit, epis- 
tolam ad Xerxen misit 



77. Parentheses. The introduction of a Pronoun may 
sometimes be avoided, and the unity of the sentence and 
prominence of the principal Subject may still be preserved, 
by the use of a parenthesis. This is very commonly used 



Par. 78a.] OR ATI O 0BL1QUA. 97 

to describe some minute circumstance connected with 
the principal Subject or Object : 

He accordingly gave orders Itaque suis imperavit ut 

to the whole a7'my to Nuceriam — aberat au- 

march to Nnceria. tern fere decern millia 

IT was about ten miles passuum- cum omnibus 

off. copiis contendere!) t. 

If the clause 1 had not been introduced parenthetically, 
immediately after Nuceria, so as to avoid the possibility 
of ambiguity, ilia or oppidum would have been of neces- 
sity inserted. 

78. In Oratio Recta the words of the speaker are used. 

The usual method of introducing a speech in Oratio 
Recta is to leave the previous sentence unfinished, sup- 
plying the verb inquit (not dixit nor respondebat) after 
the first emphatic word of the speech. 

Then Crassus said i I for Turn Crassus ' Equidem ' 
my part don't believe inquit ' non credo ' 

it* 

Why not ?' I ANSWERED Cui ego l Quare* inquam 

' non credis ? ' 

Sometimes inquit is omitted, the previous sentence 
being still left incomplete. * Turn Crassus "Equidem non 
credo." ' 

78a. In Oratio Obliqua, that must be placed before the 
English words of the speaker, which are consequently 
changed in ptrson and tense. Crassus said that he did 
not believe it. , 

The following changes take place in Latin. The first 
is so obviously necessary that it requires no reason : 

(a) Rule — All principal Verbs (that is, 
Verbs directly making a statement) are trans- 
formed from the Indicative to the Infinitive, 
retaining their original Tenses. 

H 



9$ RATIO OBLIQUA. [Par. 78a. 

(He said) * I don't BE- (Dixit) ' se neque * credere 

LIEVE it, I never DID neque credidisse neque 

believe it, and I never unquam crediturum ' 
SHALL believe it 9 

Notice that there is no change in Latin to correspond 
to the English change from the Present in Oratio Recta 
to the Past in Oratio Obliqua, ' I do not believe/ ' He 
said that he did not believe.' In Latin the Verbs, 
though changed in Mood, retain their original Tenses. 
The Latin language has not the English power of re- 
presenting the Simple Past after dixit. ' Negavit se cre- 
didisse'* would mean ' He said that he had not believed] 
i.e. in Oratio Recta ' I have not believed.' Remember 
therefore to translate : i He said that he DID not believe'' by 
' Negavit se credere.' 

The Future Infinitive dees not exist in all Latin Verbs, 
e.g. not in most Inceptives, such as mitesco, crebresco, 
cresco. We must therefore use a periphrasis 

He saia that (it would Dixit fore ut urbs cresceret 

COME TO PASS THAT) 
the city would increase 

Remember that the Passive Future Infinitive, captum 
Iri, means ' that there is a going to capture,' captum being 
an indeclinable Supine. Consequently captum cannot 
agree with urbem in : 

He said that the city WOULD Dixit urbem captum iri 
BE TAKEN 

Conditional Tenses of the Apodosis (page 83, note) that 
are in the Subjunctive in O. Recta, are rendered by the 
Fut. Partic. with esse or fuisse in O. Obliqua: 



* These words are supposed to come in the middle of a speech at a dis- 
tance from dixit : if they were close ta dixit, you would have negavit 
for dixit neque. 



Par. 78a.] 



RATIO OB LI QUA. 



99 



Oratio Recta. 

Ad haec Caesar : ' Si ' in- 
quit 'intra decimum diem 
urbem tradidissetis e- 
quidem ab oppugnandis 
muris tempera vissem ' 

Si modo , inquit 'frater 
mihi adesse^gauderem' 

' Si quid i inquit ' habeam, 
dem* 



Oratio Obliqua. 
Ad haec Caesar respondit : 
1 Se, si intra decimum 
diem urbem tradidis- 
sent, ab oppugnandis 
muris temper a turum 
fuisse ' 

' Si frater sibi adesset, se 
gavisurum fuisse. ? (Un- 
fulfilled condition) 

i Se, si quid haberet datu- 
rum esse.' (Fulfilment 
of condition possible) 



(b) In the Oratio Obliqua, the writer does not guarantee 
any statement of the speaker as a fact, and therefore has 
no right to use the Indicative. Note therefore the fol- 
lowing changes : — 



Oratio Recta. 

Turn alter ' Misi ' inquit 
' servos quos habui fide- 
lissimos ' 

Cui Balbus 'Veniam' inquit 
1 si potero, quanquam 
hodi-e segrotoj sin mi- 
nus, veniet frater, qui 
decern tantum millia 
passuum abest ' 

Ule respondens i Si ' in- 
quit ' Cicero occisus 
erit, omnes moriemur' 

Rule — Subordinate 
Indicatives following 
* quanquam/ ' quum/ 
Recta, are changed 
Oratio Obliqua. 



Oratio Obliqua. 

1 Se misisse servos quos 
(in his opinion) fidelissi- 
mos haberet ' 

'Se venturum, si posset, 
quanquam illo die 
segrotaret; sin minus, 
venturum fratrem, qui 
decern tantum millia 
passuum abesset ' 

1 Si Cicero occisus esset, 
se omnes morituros 
esse * 

Indicatives, that is, 

1 qui,' ■ quia/ ■ quam/ 

4 etsi/ * si/ in Oratio 

into Subjunctives in 

h 2 



ioo O RATIO OBUQUA. [Par. 78a. 

Where qili=et is, nam is, it is sometimes followed by the Infinitive 

in Oratio Obliqua : thus ' qui abest' in the la^t example but one, above, might 
have been rendered in Oruio Obliqua by 'quem (nam eum) abesse.* 
Beginners had better not use this licence. 

(c) Put he said that, before an Imperative, e.g. run, 
licet curras, fac curras. Run will then have to be 
changed into he ought to run, currendum esse, or he 
mighty should, run (lie ere ut) curreret, (faciendum esse 
ut) curreret. Hence : 

The general cried, ' Press on, do not give ground. 1 

Oratio Recta. Oratio Obliqua. 

Imperator' Instate ' inquit, Imperator milites hortatur 
' nolite pedem referre 9 (Hist. Pres.) ' instarent, 

nollent pedem referre,' 
i.e. ' let them press on.' 

Rule — Imperatives in Oratio Recta are to 
be turned into Imperfect Subjunctives in 
Oratio Obliqua. 



(d) A question in the Second Person, e.g. i What are 
you doing?' may naturally become a Dependent Inter- 
rogative, when preceded by he said, which implies he 
asked. Thus : 

4 Why are you advancing t 'Curprogrederentur? Cur 
Why did you not sound non receptui cecinis- 

the retreat f l sent ? ' 

Rule — Questions in the Second Person 
are to be rendered in the Oratio Obliqua by 
the Imperfect or Pluperfect Subjunctive. 

Questions, being asked about oneself, or about an absent person, are very 
often not asked for information, but to express emotion. They are then 
called questions of appeal. If 'Why do I delay?' were rendered in 
Oratio Obliqua ' (interrogavit) cur moraretur,' it would seem toj formal and 
frigid, as though it were a question really asked for information Hence the 
Latins prefer to render such passionate questions by the Infinitive. ' He said 
he was delaying there— (and) why V * Cur se morar i ? 



Par. 78a.] OR A TIO OBLIQUA. IOI 

' Why are we lingering * Cur se ibi morari ? Cur 
here ? Why is our abesse imperatorem ? ' 

ge?ieral absent ? ' 

The Future Indicative must be rendered by the Future 
Infinitive : 

1 WILL the enemy DELAY ? ' ' Num hostem moraturum 

esse ? ' 

Rule — Questions in the First and Third 
Person are to be rendered in the Oratio 
Obliqua by the Accusative of the Person, 
and the Infinitive of the Verb. 



(e) Pronouns, Personal and Demonstrative, together 
with their derived Adverbs, will usually be changed. 

Of course ego, tu, nos, and vos cannot possibly find a 
place in Oratio Obliqua ; me must be changed into se, tn 
into ille, &c Further, ' I stand here] said he, ' for justice,' 
will be changed into * He said that he stood there for 
justice.' Thus, hie will be changed into iUe, nunc into 
turn, hie (adv.) into ibi ; and hodie would be regularly 
changed into illo die. But, for vividness' sake, the de- 
monstrative forms may sometimes be retained. 

(/) He, him, his, are often ambiguous in an English 
speech reported (as in newspapers) in Oratio Obliqua. The 
Latin distinction between se and ilium diminishes but 
does not remove the ambiguity. 

The general rule is that se refers to the speaker, thus ■ 

' Let them not distrust his ' Ne de sua vigilantia du- 
watchfulness ' bitarent ■ 

But, when suus is wanted to refer to the Subject of 
some subordinate Verb, eg. of dubitarent above, then 
Ipse is sometimes used antithetically to refer to the 
speaker, thus : 



102 



0RATI0 Oh LI QUA. 



[Par. 78a. 



1 Let them not distrust their ' Ne de sua virtu te aut de 
own valour or his ipsms vigilantia de- 

watchfulness * sperarent ' 

At other times, the ipse emphasizes a subordinate Sub- 
ject to shew that suus, se refer to that Subject, and not to 
the principal Subject 

He said ' he {the speaker) * Se monere ilium ut se 
advised him to save ipse servaret' 

himself 

(g) The sentence preceding a speech in Oratio Obliqua 
is often completed, and the speech begun with the Verb of 
speaking implied and not expressed. ' Imperator in hunc 
modum milites hortabatur. " Instarent ; quid morarentur ? 
Praesto esse victoriam."' 

The following is an example of the differences between 
Oratio Recta and Oratio Obliqua : — 



Oratio Recta. 

Imperator, milites hortatus 
* Instate ' inquit. ' Cur 
nunc hie moramur ? 
Num hostis morabitur ? 
Nolite dubitare de ves- 
tra virtute aut de xnea vi- 
gilantia. Siignavusfuis- 
sem, vos deseruissem, 
urbs enim, ut opinor, 
non facile capietur, ne- 
que frigoris vismitescet. 
Sed nolo ignavia vitam 
emere. Quod impera- 
torem decuit id perf eci ; 
quod si pro patria mo. 
riar, mortem non invitus 
oppetam' 



Oratio Obliqua. 

Imperator milites in hunc 
modum hortabatur. 

' Instarent. Cur turn 
se ibi morari ? Num 
hostem moraturum es- 
se ? N ollent de sua vir- 
tute aut de ipsius vigi- 
lantia dubitare. Si ig- 
navus fuisset, se iilos 
deserturuxn fuisse : ur- 
bem enim, (sic se opi- 
nari) non facile captum 
iri,neque fore ut frigoris 
vis mitesceret. Sed 
nolle (se) ignavia vitam 
emere. Quod impera- 
torem deceret, id se 
perfecisse : quod si pro 
patria moreretur, mor* 
tern non invitum oppe- 
tituruna' 



Par 79.] 



METAPHORS. 



103 



79. Metaphors. 

An English Metaphor, e.g. this thought struck me^ need 
not, and often cannot, be rightly translated literally into 
Latin. To say (as Quintilian says) feriit, would mean for- 
cibly impressed, whereas we wish to convey little more than 
suggested itself, occurred to me. The right translation 
would be ' hoc mihi in mentem venit.' 

Many English words and expressions are metaphorical, 
though we use them so commonly that we have almost 
forgotten the latent metaphor, eg. ' at its height/ ' on the 
point of/ ' on the ground that/ ' the scene (i.e. stage) of his 
disgrace/ ' at this juncture, stage.' Many other recog- 
nized Metaphors can be rendered by other Latin Meta- 
phors, but not literally. 

The pupil must gain, by observation and practice, the 
power of rightly rendering English Metaphors into Latin. 
The following are a few instances selected to shew meta- 
phorical diversity in the two Languages :— 



/ am being TORTURED and 
worn out with sor- 
row 

All the rest springs from 
what has bee7i men- 
tioned before 

At all hazards, we must 
make eveiythijig sub- 
servient to seeing this 
poor girl respectably 
married 

They vented their anger 
on me 

I maintain that thei'e is an 
influence that may be 
exerted by God on men 

Sensual pleasure, you see } 
is transitory 



Lacerat animum atque 
exest asgritudo 

Ex his quae dicta sunt re- 
liqua nascuntur omnia 

Quoquo modo se habebit, 
illius misellae et matri- 
monio et famae servien- 
dum erit 

In me iram profuderunt 

Dico esse quod a diis ad 
hominum vitam perma- 
nare possit 

Fluit igitur voluptas cor- 
poris 



K>4 



METAPHORS. 



[Par. 79 



Greece SWARMS with ora- 
tors 

No one can approach 
Africanus in military 
distinction 



If it were expedie7icy that 
KNITS friends, a com- 
plete change of expe- 
diency would 'part them 

When one's anger has 

COOLED 
The conspiracy is AT ITS 

HEIGHT 

When jnatters GO ON as we 
would have them 

Low though the laws are 
FALLEN, yet they will 
07ie day rise 

/ BURY myself in my books 

I AM KILLING TWO BIRDS 
WITH ONE STONE 

The teaching of Pythagoras 
HAS SPREAD even here 

Affection SPRINGING from 
this origin gradually 
DIFFUSES itself abroad 

Mark what this kind of 
argument LEADS TO 

The summer was WASTED 

/ have been DEEPLY 
grieved by your two 
letters 



Redundat Graecia ora- 
toribus 

Nemo ad Africanum in 
militari laude aspirare 
potest. (Only with 
negatives classically- 
used in this sense) 

Si Utilitas conglutinaret 

amicos, eadem commu- 
tata dissolveret 



Restinctis jam animorum 

inoendiis 
Ardet acerrime conjuratio 



Rebus ad voluntatem nos- 
tram nuentibus 

Leges, quamvis sint demer- 
sse, emergent tamen ali- 
quando 

Literis me involvo 

Duos parietes de eadem 
fidelia dealbo. Or, 

Una mercede duas res 
assequor 

Hue etiam permanavit Py- 
thagoras doctrina 

Caritas, hinc nata, serpit 
sensim foras 



Attende quo serpat hoc ar- 
gument genus 

Effluxit aestas 

Binae tuae literse valde me 
momorderunt 



Par. 79.] 



METAPHORS 



105 



His character had" been 
TAINTED, or rather 
BLASTED by that con- 
deimiation 

The musician did not TAKE 
THE fancy OF the peo- 
ple 

I fear the ATTRACTION of 
habit may prove too 
powerful for us 

What a SEA of evils / 

These remi?iiscences have 
a sort of painful STING 



Ex damnatione ilia semins- 
tus, vel potius ambus- 
tus evaserat 

Tibicen frigebat ad popu- 
lum (friget often means, 
loses influence) 

Vereor ne sestus nos con- 
suetudinis absorbeat 

Quanta miseriarum incen- 
dia 

Hse recordationes morsu 
quodam dolorem efn- 
ciunt 



It will be seen from the preceding examples that the 
simple Metaphors borrowed from heat, cold, flowing, 
breathing, bi-eaking, &c. are more common in Latin than 
in English. 

Latin is also more exuberant than English in the use 
of Metaphors. Note the use of different Verbs expressive 
of Metaphors, where in English we should use one Verb, 
sometimes varying the Metaphor in Nouns. 



I have lived an honourable 
and prosperous life 

As I hope to prosper, gen- 
tlemen, I can assure you 
that I have never allowed 
myself to be prevented 
from ministering to the 
necessities or interests of 
anyone, either by the at- 
tractions of leisure, or 
by the alluring voice of 
pleasure, or even by the 
necessity of sleep 



Viximus honestissime, flo- 
ruimus 

Ita vivo, judices, ut a nul- 
lius unquam me tempore 
aut commodo, aut otium 
meum abstraxerit, aut 
voluptas avocarit, aut 
denique somnus retar- 
darit 



io6 HYPERBOLE. [Par. 8a 

Compare the verbose English and the terse Latin in the 
following example : — 

Give us a man that will Si quis nee tabes eat moles- 
not suffer himself to be tiis, nee frangatur ti- 

■worn out by petty annoy- more, nee sitienter quid 

ances, or prostrated by expetens ardeat deside- 

terror, a mail that, in the rio, nee alacritate futili 

pursuit of any object, gestiens deliquescat, is 

will not give way to sit sapiens quern quseri- 

feverish desire, nor suf- mus 

fer his will to waste its 
strength in eager useless 
longings — and we have 
here the wise man that 
is the object of our search 

The English is a great deal too verbose ; and it would 
be more idiomatic though less literal to use one Verb and 
say, ' that will not give way to the feelings of petty irri- 
tation, or sudden terror, or feverish desire, or useless 
longing . . J 

Personifications are more common in English than in Latin. "In English 
prose you might find a phrase like this, * In the presence of purity so spotless, 
detraction hid its head, and envy ceased to whisper.' This way of speaking 
of ideas as if they were things ... .is quite foreign to the simplicity and 
straightforwardness of Latin Prose." * 

80. Hyperbole, like Metaphor, must not always be 
literally rendered. For example, it does not follow, be- 
cause we use a thousand to denote an indefinitely large 
number, that the Latins should use milie. It would be 
interesting to ascertain why they use sexcenti in the fol- 
lowing example : 

I prefer a thousand deaths Malo sexcenties mori 

* Bigg's Easy Exercises in Latin Prose, 



MISCELLANEOUS IDIOMS. 



MISCELLANEOUS IDIOMS. 



/ asked him to come to Rome 

I have asked him to stop at 
Rome 

When will you ask him to 
set out from Rome t 

She is ten years old 

There, are some who have 
said this was not true 

Whe7i a boy, I was charmed 
with this book 

They sent ambassadors to 
ask for peace 

You surely don't ask why 
we did this 

A slave of mine 

I wrote y that you might 
hear the sooner 

I shall soon know what you 
wish 

That wicked Tullius has 
caused me to despair 



Rogavi ilium ut Romam ve- 
nire t 

Rogavi ilium ut Romas ma. 
neat 

Quando ilium rogabis ut 
Roma proficiscatur ? 

Decern annos nata est 

Sunt qui negaverint hsec 
vera esse 

Hie liber mihi puero valde 
placuit. (Omit When) 

Legatos miserunt qui pacem 
peterent 

Num rogas cur hoc fecerl- 
xnus ? 

Quidam e servis meis 

Scripsi, quo citius intelli- 
greres 

Mox sciam quid velis 

Tullius, homo improbissi- 
mus, effecit ut desperem. 
(Or, improbus ille Tul- 
lius) 



no 



MISCELLANEOUS IDIOMS. 



The town of Corioli was 
taken 

The heat was so great that 
almost all of us were un- 
able to go on 

Why don't you enjoy what 
you've bought ? 

It is your interest that there 
should be peace; it is his 
that there should be war 

He threatens his own brother 
with death 

Ten days after the capture of 

Thebes 

I fear he will not come 

I will teach you music 

You are being too much 
indulged 

Dottt spare the prisoners 



I feared he would come too 
soon 

He recommendea his brother 
to escape 

He has recommended his 
own children to remain 
at Rome 

The celebrated Alexander 

Send me the most beautiful 
flowers you have 



Corioli oppidum captum est 
(not capti sunt) 

Tantus erat calor ut fere 
omnes progredi non pos- 
semus 

Cur non emptis frueris ? 



Tua interest pacem, illius 
bellum esse 



Suo ipsius fratri mortem 

minatur 

Decimo die 
Thebas 

Vereor ut veniat 

Musicam te docebo 

Nimis tibi indulge tur 



post captas 



Noli captivis parcere. (Or, 
ne peperceris, but not 
ne parcas in prose) 

Veritus sum ne citius veniret 

Fratri suo * ut fugeret sua- 

sit 

Liberis suis suasit ut Roma 
maneant 



Alexander ille 

Cura ut ad me {not mini) 
flores mittas, quos ha- 
beas pulcherrimos 



* Suo may be omitted where the omission leaves no doubt whose brother 
fe meant. 



MISCELLANEOUS IDIOMS. 



ill 



He reduced the Gauls to 
subjection 

In six days we came from 
Athens to Samos 

What have I to do with 
you t 

I shall go back to my home 
in Italy 

There are some who hate me 

Having made this answer, 
he went home 

He came sooner tha?t he was 
expected 

He has long been desirous 
of death 

Ccesar was killed by a frietid 



The battle took place in a 
narrow valley 

This was done by an enemy 
and not by chance 

He will see to the gathering 
of the flowers 

In front was the sea, in our 
rear the enemy 



He made a long speech with- 
out persuading anyone to 
forpive him 



Gallon suse ditionis fecit 

Sexto die Athenis Samum 

venimus 

Quid mini tecum est ? 
Domum in Italiam redibo 

Sunt qui me oderint 

Hoc responso, domum abiit 

Opinione celerius venit 

Jamdudum mortem optat 

Caesarem interfecit amicus. 
(Note the emphatic posi- 
tion of amicus, and the 
use of Latin Active for 
English Passive) 

In angusta valle pugnatum 
est 

Hoc non casu sed ab inimico 
factum est. (a or ab wich 
living agent) 

Flores carpendos curabit 

Mare a fronte, a tergo hostes 
imminebant. (Note the 
similarity of the Extremes 
and Means in a Latin An- 
tithesis) 

Orationem longam habuit, 
neque tamen ulli persua- 
sit ut sibi igmosceret 



112 



MISCELLANEOUS IDIOMS, 



We shall set out from Car- 
thage about the Jtk of 
May 

How many are there of you 
in London f 

Truth is the parent of what 
is expedient as well as of 
what is just 

Philosophy ought to have 
been your master 



I hoped you would be con- 
quered 

It is not like a brave man to 
lose one's presence of mind 

I was the first to be asked to 
give an opinion 

We ought not to have been 
kepi in ignorance of this 



I was somewhat disturbed by 
the shouts 

Three hundred of us are 
preparea to conquer or 
die 

I am persuaded that what 
you say is false 

He took and burned the 
bridge 

It rarely happens that } &*c. 



Carthagine circiter Nonas 
Maias proficiscemur 

Quot Iiondinii habitatis ? 

Veritas non justi solum sed 
etiam utiiitatis mater est. 
(Notutilis, on account of 
the ambiguity) 

Philosophia tibi xnagistra 
esse debuit. (Not magis- 
ter, because Philosophia 

is feminine) 

Speravi te vie turn iri or fore 
ut vincereris 

Non est fortium perturbari 

Ego primus rogatus sum 
sententiam 

Non debuimus hoc (de hac 
re) celari. (Note, the 
Noun requires de, the 
Neuter Pronoun does not) 

Clamor me nescio quid per- 
turbaverat 

Trecenti parati sumus aut 
ad vincendum aut ad mo- 
riendum. (Not paramur) 

Persuasum est mihi te falsa 
dicere 

Pontem captum incendit 

Raro evenit ut, &c. (Rare = 
thinly , far apart) 



MISCELLANEOUS IDIOMS. 



"3 



My sister married his brother, 
ana my brother his sister 

When he perforins a judge's 
duties rightly, then and 
not till then will he be 
worthy of praise 

Has he been persuaded to 
speak the truth ? 

He imputed my virtue to me 
as a fault 

With you for our leader, we 
will not shrink even from 
famine 

She p7'omises not to say one 
word 

It is absolutely necessary for 
me to go 

No poet ever thought anyone 
superior to himself 

He is the best jumper in the 
school 

I cannot help fearing 

I am different from what I 

once was 
The better you are {one is), 

the happier you are {one 

is) 
Hardly anyone saw him die 

Most of us think more of our 
own virtues than of those 
of our friends 



* Ullum (Adj.) = any {poet), quenquam (Pron ) 
Madvig, Par x>, 3. 



Soror mea fratri ejus nupsit, 
frater autem sororem ejus 
in matrimonmm duxit 

Hie, quum judicis munere 
recte fungetur, turn de- 
mum laude dignus erit 

Num ei persuasum est ut 
vera dicat? 

Virtutem meam mihi vitio 
dedit 

Te duce, ne famem quidem 
pertimescemus 

Promittit se ne verbnm qui- 
dem emissuram esse 

Necesse est me ire, or, 
Necesse est earn 

Nemo poeta ullum * quam se 
meliorem putavit 

Discipulorum, si quis alms, 
ille optime saltat 

Facere non possum quin ti- 
meam 

Alius sum atque olim fui 

Quo quis melior, eo beatior 
Ut quisqne optimus, ita 

beatissimus 
Nemo fere eum morientem 

vidit 
Plerique nostras plnris quam 

amicomm virtutes aesti- 

mamus 

See 



any man. 

I 






"4 



MISCELLANEOUS IDIOMS. 



He is the best painter in all 
Italy 

A thousand soldiers 

Ten thousand soldiers 

Are you equal to bearing this 
great burdeji ? 

Anyone can boast that he is 
more learned than any o?ie 
of his own pupils 



The hope of taking booty 

There were so7ne that pitied 
the prisoners 

r ou ought to have respected 
him as a father 

I have a hundred ho7'semen 
and six hundred infantry 

I expect the city will be cap- 
tured 

I fear that something has 
happened amiss, and thai 
some misfortune is trou- 
bling you 

The spirit, the purpose, and 
the feeling of a country 
are expressed in its laws 



tie said that I was not wise, 
you say that I was not 
honest 



Pictor est quails in tota Ita- 
lia nemo 

Mille milites 

Decern millia mill turn 

Num es tanto oneri ferendo 1 
(Or, par es) 

Cuilibet promptum est gloriari 
se doctiorem esse quam 
quemquam e discipulis 
suis. (Quemquam by 
attraction, see Par. 63) 

Spes capiendse praedse 

Erant qui captivorum mise- 
rerentur 

Debuisti eum seque ac pa- 
ttern vereri 

Sunt mihi centum equites, 
pedites autem sexcenti 

Credo urbem captum iri. (Or 
vereor ne, or spero, but 
not expecto) 

Vereor ne quid mali accid- 
erit, ne quod infortunium 
te perturbet 

Animus et consilium et sen- 
tentia civitatis in legibus 
posita est. (Verb, being 
Singular, agrees with 
nearest Subject) 

Ille negavit me sapientem 
esse, tu autem negas me 
probum fuisse. (Note the 
Pres. Infin. after a Verb 
speaking in the Past) 



MISCELLANEOUS IDIOMS. 



»S 



He pities no one 



I have lost the book you gave 
me 

The quarrels of lovers should 
be treated as a renewal of 
love 



My wife and son are dead 

I will do it if I can 

The general, in his usual 
forgetf illness, passed by 
the tents of the sentries 

I yesterday asked him to come 
to Rome 

The man that is freed from 
debt is void of care 

I am sorry to hear this 

Many great disaavantages 

He will come with speed from 
Carthage 

For ten years he filled the 
office of a judge 

I have asked him to come ana 
see me to-morrow 



Nullius (not neminis) mise- 
retur 

Perdidi librum quem mihi 

dedisti, or 
Quem mihi dedisti librum 

eum perdidi 

Amantium irae amoris inte- 
gratio putanda est. (Or, 
change order, and write 
putandse sunt amoris in- 
tegratio) 

Uxor mea et filius mortui 
sunt 

Hoc si potero {not possum) 
faciam 

Imperator, ut erat mente im- 
memori* (not e) vigil-um 
(not ium) tentoria proete- 
riit 

Rogavi eum heri ut Romam 
veniret 

Qui sere alieno liberatus est, 
is est cura vacuus 

Invitus hsec audio 

Multa et magna incommoda 

Carthagine celerrime (or 
summa celeritate, but not 
celeritate) veniet 

Decern amies judicis munere 
fungebatur 

Rogavi eum ut eras veniat 
me visum 



* Par and memor always have -i; pauper, princeps, supersres, 

COmpos, always -e, and dives and ales generally -e. It would seem that 
those Adjectives that are used as Nouns., prefer the -e. The Noun pgr makes 
Abl. pare. So, use sapiente for the Noun, sapienti for the Adjective. 

I 2 



n6 



MISCELLANEOUS IDIOMS. 



I will help you once and no 
more 

I am surprised at this 

Sicily is opposite Carthage 

I was once walking in a 
ineadaiv 

Why do you oppose me to no 
purpose f 

1 shall die and no one will 
help me 

I shall abiae by my opinion 

Does anyone deny this ? 

I caimot write for weeping 

Once a ki7ig reigned over 
Corinth 

I 9 11 give all of y oti a dena- 
rius apiece 

You are ten miles nearer the 
city than I am 

Trust as many men as pos- 
sible 

They will run on their several 
errands 

He came to such a pitch of 
folly that he did not believe 
even his own father 

One uses one medicine, an- 
other another 

He came as soon as possible 



Semei, non saepius tibi subve- 
niam 

Hoc mihi admirationem mo- 
vet. (Not hoc miror) 

Sicilia e regione est Cartha- 
gini (or Cartnaginis) 

Forte in prato ambulabam 

Cur mihi frustra adversaris ? 
(Not opponis) 

Moriar nee quisquara mihi 
succurret. (Not et nemo) 

In sententia manebo 

Num quis hoc negat ? 

Pree lacrimis scribere non 
possum 

Olim {or quondam) rex Corin- 
tho praeerat (regno is 
Intransitive) 

Singulos denarios vobis om- 
nibus dabo 

Decern tu miliibus propins 
quam ego, ab urbe abes 

Quam plurimis crede 

Suum quisque iter current 

Eo stultitise venit ut ne suo 
quidem patri crederet 

Alius alia medicina utitur 

Quam celerrime venit 



MISCELLANEOUS IDIOMS. 



"7 



Everyone trusts me, but no 
one will trust him 

He is more dutiful (pius) 
than his brother 

Everyone trusts me, but 
without any affection 



I know you will grow cold 
None of you will pardon me 

The country is ruined 

There's no doubt, citizens, 
that he pities you 

The house is finished 



This will be a protection to 
me 

I have warned yoti of this, 
and have left nothing un- 
done that 7nay be of use 
to you 

Some run one way, others 
another 

My name is Tullius 

He died ten years after the 
founding of the city 

The towii had been sur- 
rounded by the enemy 
with a ditch 



Omnes (not quisque nor om- 

nis) mihi, nemo autem 
illi credit 

Magis est quam frater, pius 
(not piior) 

Omnes mihi credunt sed sine 
ullo amore. (Autem adds 
something different, sed 
something limiting or con- 
tradictory) 

Scio fore ut friges cas 

Nemo vestrum (not vestri) 
mihi ignoscet 

Actum est de re-publica 

Non est dubium, cives, quin 
vestri (not vestrum) mi- 

sereatur 

^Ldes perfectse sunt (not 
perficiuntur : cedes sing, 
means a temple) 

Hoc erit mihi praesidio 

Hoc te monui, nee quidquam 

praetermisi quod tibi utile 
esse possit 

Alii alio currunt 



Nomen mihi est Tullio (or 
Tullius) 

Decern annis post urbem con- 
ditam obiit 

Hostis oppido fossam (or 

oppidum fossa) circunv 
dederat 



ITS 



MISCELLANEOUS IDIOMS. 



I sold for eightpence what I 
had bought for two shil- 
lings 

He was condemned to death 

Will you sell your life for 
two shillings a ddy ? 

I do not mind being without 
riches 

This wds the mdn that de- 
ceived me 

I have ascertained thdt the 
fellow is wdsting his 
ti?ne 

The sun is many times larger 
than the earth 

He inflicted punishment on 
his {own) son 

For ten years I have been a 
pupil of Socrates 

A peck of corn was at that 
time worth three sesterces 

You ought to have answered 
before 

Troy was besieged by the 
Greeks for te7i years 

On our journey we were at- 
tdcked by robbers 

I prefer fighting on horseback 
to fighting on foot 

I think very highly of the ex- 
cellent Tullius 

He threw himself at the 
general's feet 



Quod tribus denariis emeram 
id uno vendidi 



Capitis damnatus est 

Num trinis in diem denariis 
sanguinem vendes ? 

Facile careo divitiis 

Hie, hie inquam me fefellit 

Compertum habeo hominem 
tempus terere 

Multis partibus major est sol 
quam terra 

Filium suum poena affecit 

Decimum jam annum Socra- 
tem audio 

Tritici modius id temporis 
temis sestertiis erat 

Antea te mihi respondere 
oportuit (or debuisti mini 
respondere) 

Trojam decern annos Grseci 
oppugnaverunt 

Latrones nos ex itinere ad- 

orti sunt 

Malo ex equo quam pedes 
(adj.) (or pedibus) pug- 
nare 

Tullium, virum optimum, 
plurimi facio 

Imperatori ad pedes se pro- 
jecit 



MISCELLANEOUS IDLOMS. 



119 



/ heard him say that was 

not trice 
You ought to have seen him 

jump 
Why may L not be grave ? 

Why did you build this great 

bridge over this small 

river f 
It is possible you have made 

a mistake 
When we say " in Virgil? 

we do not necessarily 

mean " in the ALneid" 
My dear friend Balbus is 

near the city 
You and he promised to be 

present 

Trees flourish in the country, 
men in town 

Horse, foot and baggage, all 
were destroyed 

He blamed me without ascer- 
taining what I had done 

With his usual folly, the 
fellow denied it all, and 
that too in my presence 

The enemy at once sounded a 
retreat. When he heard 
this, the general bade his 
men also retire 



With your usual kindness 
you will pardon his folly 



Audivi ilium negantem id 
verum esse 

Oportuit te ilium saltantem 
spectare 

Cur mihi non licet esse se- 
vero ? 

Cur in tarn parvo flumine 
pontem tantum fecisti ? 

Fieri potest ut errorem fece- , 
ris 

Si quando "apud Virgilium" 
dicimus,non continuo "in 
^neide" dicere volumus 

Balbus, vir mihi amicissi- 
mus ; prope ab urbe abest 

Et tu et ille promisistis vos 
adfuturos esse 

Ruri arbores, in urbe homi- 
nes vigent 

Equites, pedites, impedimen- 
ta, omnia periere (where 
" and" is to be omitted) 

Me culpavit, neque quid fe- 
cissem intellexit 

Homo, cujus est stultitiae, 
omnia, idque me coram, 
infitiabatur 

Hostes confestim receptui 
canunt. Quod quum au- 
divisset imperator, suis 
quoque, ut recedant, im- 
perat 

Tu, pro tua dementia, ho- 
mini stulto veniam dabis 



120 



MISCELLANEOUS IDIOMS. 



As long as you are detained 
there you will never be 
free from annoy a7ice 

He died not long afterwards 

You have more than four 
hundred horsemen with 
you 

They paid tribute o?ice every 
ten years 

I propose to set out about ten 
in the morning 

Anybody is believed by fools 

As to the prisoners they are 
brought back, and no one 
has escaped 

But no ?nore of this, now I 
return to more serious 
matters 

He was alike treacherous in 
peace and in war 

He is two inches taller than 
any of his brothers 

By the advice of Aris tides 
they rejected the plan 

No one btit the consul heard 
him take the oath 

Boys are persuaded more 
easily than old men 

He asked which was the 
younger of you 

The man is good, but by no 
means wise 



Quoad ibi detineberis, nun- 

quam molestiis carebis 

Haud ita multo post obiit 

Quadringentos equites am- 
piius tecum habes 

Decimo quoque anno tribu- 

tum pendebant 

(Consilium est mihi) . .. 
\t ii r circiter 

Un ammo haoeo J 

quartam horam proficisci 

Cuilibet (or cuivis) credunt 
stulti 

Quod attinet ad captivos, 
reductisunt nee quisquam 

effugit 

Sed hsec hactenus : nunc ad 
graviora redeo 

Tarn in pace quam in bello 
infidus erat 

Duabus imciis procerior est 
quam quisquam ex fratri- 
bus 

Consilium, auctore Aristide, 

rejecerunt 

Nemoprseter consulem ilium 
jurantem audivit 

Pueris facilius quam senibus 
persuadetur 

Rogavit uter vestrum minor 
esset natu 

Vir est ut bonus ita nequa- 
quam sapiens 



MISCELLANEOUS IDIOMS. 



121 



I cun on the point of giving 
battle to the enemy 

The two brothers exhorted 
one another 

When did you hear that sne 
sings f 

What town do you see yonder, 
pray t 

I am very intimate with the 
few friends I have 

Everything that was of value 
was burned 

One can scarcely avoid cold 
in one's hottse, ?nuch less 
in the open air 

He is a good, nay an excellent 
man 

Every legion was divided 
into ten cohorts 



Everyone hates ingratitude 

You are all but last 

I did not know whether he 
would not remain 

Take care not to trust him 

Next year he was returned 
by Cambridge for the 
second time 

Nothing is so narrow-7?iinded 
and paltry as avarice 



In eo sum ut prselium cum 

hostibus committam 

Fratres alter alteram hortan- 
tur 

Quando audivisti illam ca- 
nere ? 

Quod tandem oppidum ibi 

prospicis ? 

Amicis quos habeo paucos 
familiarissime utor 

Quidquid erat pretiosi con- 

crematum est 

Vix in tectis frigus vitatur, 
nedum sub divo 

Vir est bonus, immo potius 
egregius 

Omnes legiones (or legio 
quseque) in denas cohortes 
di visas sunt. (Not omnia 
legio) 

Omnes beneficii immemo- 
rem oderunt. (Par. 3 a) 

Minimum abest quin ultimus 
sis 

Nesciebam an mansurus es- 
set. (Non to be omitted) 

Cave (ne) credas homini 

Proximo anno Cantabrigien- 
ses ilium iterum dele- 
gerunt 

Nihil est tarn angusti animl 
tamque parvi quam amarc 
divitias 



122 



MISCELLANEOUS IDIOMS, 



I could scarcely keep from 
venting my anger on him 

I dotft know whether you 
will do as I do 



Do you know when he will 
come t 

However wise he may be, he 
needs friends to help him 

Altho7tgh I am absent, I like 
to hear what is going on 
at home 

We wei'e almost perishing 

When I was recovering from 
tny illness I was one day 
attacked by a bull 

While this was happening 
the enemy fled 



Whether this is true or false 
it does not at all trouble 
me 

When I appi-oached the 
whelps the lion 1'ushed at 
me 

He asked me whether this 
was true or false 

I perceived the ki)idness with 
which he received me 



You have done 
coming here 



Vix me continui quin iram in 
eum evomerem 

Nescio an non eadem atque 
ego facturus sis. (Non 
inserted) 

Scisne quando venturus sit ? 

Quamvis sit sapiens, opus 
est illi amicis qui illi sub- 
vexiiant 

Quanquam absum, libenter 
tamen quid domi fiat au- 
dio 

Minimum abfuit quin perire- 
mus 

Quum ex morbo convalesce- 
bam forte taurus me pe- 
tiit. (Quum temporal) 

Dum hsec geruntur (pres.) 
hostes terga verterunt 
(perf.) 

Haec, sive vera sunt sive fal- 
sa, nihil {or nullo modo) 

me movent 

Quum ad catulos accederem 
leo me petiit. (Quum cau- 
sal) 

Interrogavit me utrum haec 
vera an falsa essent 

Intellexi quanta me benevo- 
lentia exciperet. (Not 
benevolentiam qua) 

well in Bene fecisti quod hue venisti 



MISCELLANEOUS IDIOMS. 



"3 



He answered he had se?it the 
money to Lilybceum a few 
days ago 

He died four years after he 
returned home 



I heard that the enemy had 
marched twenty miles by 
night and was now close 
at hand 

We accepted the terms on 
condition that the guards 
should be removed 

He is not a fit person for you 
to converse with 

He is too brave to fear death 



The soldiers were seized with 
fear that Cicero's wound 
might be fatal 

You are acting as foolishly 
as if you were questioning 
a deaf man 

Ccesar asked his soldiers why 
they distrusted their own 
valour or his energy 



We must wait till the elec- 
tions are held two months 
hence 



Respondit se Iiilybseum pan- 
els abiiinc diebus argen- 
tum misisse 

Anno quarto postquam do- 
mumredierat mortuusest. 
(N.B. — The pluperfect is 
allowed after postquam 
when the length of the 
interval is expressed) 

Intellexi hostem viginti millia 
noctu progressum esse et 
jam adesse. (Not nunc, 
not adfuisse) 

Ita accepimus conditiones 
nt custodes removerentur 

Non est aptus quocum collo- 
quaris 

Fortior est quam qui {or 

quam ut) mortem time at 

Pavor cepit milites ne Cice- 
ronis vulnus mortiferum 
esset 

Idem facis ac si surdum in- 
terroges 

Caesar ex militibus quaesivit 
cur de sua virtute aut de 
ipsius diligentia despera- 
rent. (ipse referring to 
the principal Subject, is 
used in contrast to se re- 
ferred to a minor Subject) 

Expectandum est nobis dum 
comitia duobus abhinc 
mensibus habeantur 



124 



MISCELLANEOUS IDIOMS. 



Socrates was called to trial 
on the charge of corrupt- 
ing the youth, but in real- 
ity because he had become 
suspected by those in 
power 

Instead of being true it is not 
even probable 

They g?'ew alarmed that with 
his changeable and artful 
natui'e he might desert 
the7n and 07ice ?nore gain 
the favour of his country- 
men 

Not till now did the citizens 
disperse to their hoines 

If you help me I shall be re- 
joiced; if not, I shall not 
take it ill 

Will you not i?.ifor?n me 
whether this is true or 
not? 

Nature prompts an infant to 
love itself 



Suppose a man is selling a 
house because of some 
faults in it 

He said it wasiit like Greek 
manners for women to 
dine with men 



Socrates in judicium vocatus 
est quod corromperet ju- 
ventutem, re tamen ipsa 
quia in suspicionem ma- 
gistratibus venerat 

Tantum abest Tit hoc verum 
sit ut ne verisimile quidem 
sit 

Pertimescebant ne, homo va- 
fer et inconstans, ab ip- 

sis descisceret et cum 
suis in gratiam rediret 



Turn demum cives suam quis- 
que domum digressi sunt 

Si mihi subvenies gaudebo ; 
sin minus, haud aegre fe- 
ram 

Nonne me certiorem facies 
utrum haec vera sint an- 
non ? (Or necne) 

Natura movet infantem ut se 
ipse diligat. (ipse, quali- 
fying the Subject of a 
clausecontainingse,shews 
that se refers to the Sub- 
ject of the clause, not to 
the principal Subject) 

Vendat vir aedes propter ali- 
qua vitia 

Negavit moris esse Graeco- 

rum ut in convivio viro- 
rum mulieres accumbe- 
rent (or, Ace. and Inf») 



MISCELLANEOUS IDIOMS. 



125 



The general encouraged his 
soldiers saying, " Why do 
you make useless lamen- 
tations f Press on. Why 
a?'e we delaying here ? 
Will not the enemy crush 
us while we delay ? If 
you had obeyed me before, 
you, would have been in 
safety by this time, a?id 
eve?i now you may yet be 
safe. Be of good courage. 
Soon the cold will grow 
less severe." 

I have often seen my country- 
men walking in the busy 
cities of A thens or Rome 



Imperator milites in hunc 
modum hortatus est, " Cur 
inutiliter plorarent ? In- 
starent ! Cur ibi se mo- 
rari ? Nonne hostem se 
morantes oppressurum 
esse ? Si sibi antea pa- 
ruissent, illos jam in tuto 
futures fuisse, salvos 
etiam turn esse posse. 
Erigerent animos. Mox 
fore ut frigus mitesceret " 



Saepe meos cives Athenis vel 
Romse, m urbibus cele- 
berrimis, ambulantes vidi 



At one time he says this, at Mode hoc, mo do illud, dicit 



another, something else 



The child hoped that the bird 
would grow tame 



Pan&tius praises Africanus, 
giving as a reason that 
he was moderate 

I prefer Alexander to Aris- 
tocles, not because the for- 
mer is altogether wise, 
but because the latter is 
not wise at all 

My father blamed me for not 
writing three letters to 
him in the whole of a 
year 



Puer (not liber except in pi.) 
speravit fore ut avis mi- 
tesceret 

Panaetius Africanum laudat 
quod fuerit abstinens 

Alexandrum Aristocli ante- 
pono, non quod ille sit 
omnino sapiens, sed quia 
hie est omnino non sa- 
piens. N.B. — sit, est 

Pater me culpavit quod per 
totum annum non ad se 
trinas literas misissem. 
(Note Distributive with 
literse, castra, &C.) 



126 



MISCELLANEOUS IDIOMS. 



Of males as many as 10,000 
were captured 



Zeuxis and Polygnotus did 
not use more than four 
colours 

Your advice is more honour- 
able than expedient 

He has peipetrated an almost 
unheard-of crime 

Not less than thh'ty horse- 
men wen killed 

All t/uit survived the battle 
were taken the next day 

They set out for the bridge, 
which was fowteen miles 
off 

I am expected to remain 



The general exho7'ted his men 
as follows : " Why do you 
make useless co?nplaints t 
Press on " 

Don't despise a joke 

Who was there that did not 
hate you ? 

We shall not be safe if Ci- 
cero is killed 

Some law were passed, others 
remained posted up 



Virile secus, ad decern millia 
capta. (Used without al- 
teration in apposition to 
all cases) 

Zeuxis et Polygnotus non 
plus quam quatuor colo- 
ribus utebantur 

Consilium das magis hones- 
turn quam utile (or ho- 
nestius quam utilius) 

Tantum non inauditum scelus 

patravit 
Haud minus triginta equites 

interfecti 

Si qui praelio superfuerant 
capti sunt postridie. 
(Never omnes qui) 

Ad pontem — aberat autem 
millia quatuordecirn— pro- 
ficiscuntur 

Omnes confidunt me mansu- 
rum esse (or postulant 

ut) 

Imperator milites hortatus 
" Cur ' inquit ' inutiliter 
ploratis? Instate!" (Note 
the introductory sentence 
left unfinished) 

Ne jocos sis aspernatus (not 
asperneris) 

Quis erat quin te odisset ? 

Tuti non erimus si Cicero 
occisus erit 

Leges alias latse sunt, aliae pro- 
mulgate fuerunt. (Madv. 

344) 



MISCELLANEOUS IDIOMS. 



127 



How few there are that are 
prepared to die for their 
country I 

I asked him what o'clock it 
was, but he made me no 
reply 

What is the meaning of the 
word pleasure ? 

I can't hope it will be my 
good fortu?te to escape 



He says that we shall not 
succeed if Cicero is killed 



I am writing this letter on 
the 7 th of March, and I 
entreat you to answer as 
soon as possible 



Bid your friends collect with 
speed 



After one or two days he 
called a meeting of all the 
surviving citizens 



What reaso?i is there why 
your departwe should be 
excused? 

Suppose you we7'e in my 
position f 



Quotusquisque est qui pa- 
ratus sit ad moriendum 
pro patria ! 

Interroganti mini quota bora 
esset nihil respondit 

Quid vult vox voluptatis ? 

Sperare non possum fore nt 
contingat xnihi evadere. 
(Do not use fut. part, of 
compounds of tango) 

Negat rem nobis bene suc- 
cessuram esse si Cicero 
occisus sit. (Fut. changed 
to Subj. in dependent 
sentence) 

Has literas Nonis Martiis 
scribebam atque oro te 
utquamprimum rescribas. 
(To the reader, the writing 
is past, the entreaty re- 
mains present) 

Amicos tuos jube quam celer- 
rime convenire. (Re- 
member that colligere is 

Transitive) 

Post unum et alteram diem 
convocat si qui {or quid- 
quid) civium supererant. 
(Or qui cives . . . omnes, 
but not omnes cives qui) 

Quid e.st causae cur abeas 

excusatus ? 



Fac, quasso, qui 
esse te? 



ego sum 



128 



MISCELLANEOUS IDIOMS. 






I wrote yesterday from Ephe- 
sus, to-day I write from 
Tralles 

He is too rich to be in want 
of money 

See that you sell half-a- 
dozen houses 

I have no fault to find with 
old age 

It is said that Agesilaus lived 
to the age of seventy 

You will do well to remem- 
ber the difference between 
a frie7id and a flatterer 

Cuspius y from whom you will 
receive these two letters, 
is useful to me in many 
ways 

After I had spent the month 
of May there, we were 
detained from the ^rd of 
June to the 12 th Sep tern- 
ber 

I shall 7iot believe your p7'o- 
mises, unless you fulfil 
what you have already 
promised 

It was resolved to send am- 
bassadors to ask what was 
the meaning of these re- 
peated insults 

Yesterday evening he return- 
ed home to his family 



Dederam Epheso pridie, has 
dedi Trallibus 



Divitior est quam ut pecuniae 
egeat. (Ditior rare in 
prose) 

Fac senas cedes vendas. 

(Not sex) 

Nihil habeo quod incusem 
senectutem 

Dicitur Agesilaus ad septua- 

gesimum annum vitam 
egisse 

Bene facies si memineris 
quantum inter amicum et 
assentatorem intersit 

Cuspius, a quo binas h^s 
litteras accepisti, multis 
in rebus mihi utilis est 

Postquam ibi mensem Maium 
consumpsi, ex ante diem 
tertium Nonas Junias us- 
que ad pridie Idus Sep- 
tembres tenebamur 

Ita credam promissis si qua? 
jam promisisti solveris 



Placuit legatos mitti qui ro- 
garent quid vellent hae 
tot contumelies 

Heri, vesperi domum ad ux- 
orem liberosque rediit 
(not familiam) 



MISCELLANEOUS IDIOMS. 



129 



With what decency, pray, 
can you insult thus so 
excellent a man as Tul- 
Uust 

If he had not run away, I 
should have helped the 
poor ?na7i with pleasure 



I came to see you at once, in- 
as7nuch as I had received 
many kindnesses at your 
hands 

This is too good to be true . 

You must be ignorant of your 
position 

If I knew, I would tell 



But I should not have time, 
if I tried to relate it all 



No one is so keen-sighted as 
not to be occasionally de- 
ceived 

Would that you thought as I 
did, or, since that is im- 
possible, would that you 
would think that I mean 
well 



Quo tandem ore Tullium, 
virum egregium tanta 
contuxnelia afficis ? 



Homini miserrimo, nisi au- 
fugisset, libenter (not 
lsete, nor voluptate) suc- 
currissem 

Statim veni te visum, ut qui 

multa beneficia a te acce- 
pissem 

Meliora haec sunt quam quae 
possint esse vera 

Fieri non potest quin nescias 

quo in loco sis. (Not po- 
situm, or positionem) 

Si scirem, dicer em (I do 
not know, and my telling 
is impossible. Condition 
regarded as impossible) 

Sed tempus me deficiat, si 
omnia nunc narrare ve- 
lim. (I might try, but I 
do not intend to. The 
condition is possible, but 
will not occur) 

Nemo est tam lynceus qui 

non interdum fallatur 



Utinam tu eadem atque ego 
sentires, vel, si hoc fieri 
non potest, utinam cre- 
das me bene velle. (Note 
various uses of thinfc) 
K 



13° 



MISCELLANEOUS IDIOMS. 



Cicero has been banished, a 
calamity that is deplored 
by every respectable person 

I shall leave nothing undone 
to banish the most tu? r bu- 
lent citizens 

He promised to come on the 
nth of September, but did 
not co7ne till the nth of 
October 

What would you take to 
jump off this bridge? 

It would have bee7i better to 
have a7iswered Yes or No 

I asked him whether he would 
have helped me if he had 
bee?i able 

I praise this, not because it is 
honourable but because it 
is useful 

The eneiny flock 7'0U7id i7i the 
hope offi7idi7ig so7ne i7ilet 

histead of tha7iking me he 
abused me 

hi the case of a slave, this 
might have bee7i 7nain- 
tai7ied, 7iot i7i the case of 
a free ma7i 

Alas for the deceitfuhiess of 
hu77ia7i hopes! 

I a7n a7ixious for your sake 

I do not know what I should 
have done 



Cicero ex urbe pulsus est, id 
quod {or quam calamita- 

tem) boni plorant omnes 

Nihil praetermittam quin vio- 
lentissimum quemque ci- 
vium ex urbe pellam 

Adventum, quem in ante 
diem tertium Idus Sep- 
tembres promisit, in ante 
diem quintum Idus OctO- 
bres distulit 

Quid velis mereri ut de hoc 
ponte desilias ? 

Satius fuit aut Etiam ant 
Non respondere 

Interrogavi eum utrum mihi 
subventurus fuisset si 
potuisset 

Illud laudo, non quod hones- 
turn sit sed quia utile sst 

Circumfunduntur hostes si 
quem aditum reperire pos- 
sint 

Quum gratias mihi agere de- 
beret mihi maledixit 

Hoc in servo dici potuit, in 
ingenuo non potuit 



O fallacem hominum spem ! 

Tuam vicem sollicitus sum 
Nescio quid facturus fuerixn 



GRADUATED EXERCISES. 



{Each Exercise is based on the one or more preceding exercises* 
For example, "your kind uncle Tullius," in the second Exercise, 
is an instance of the same rule as is exemplified in ' ' the 
prodigal Balbus " in the first Exercise. The References in the 
first Exercises are to the Paragraphs in " Rules and Reasons") 



HINTS FOR TRANSLATING CONTINUOUS PROSE. 

1. Read over your English [not one sentence at a time, but the 
whole passage) till you have mastered its meaning. 

2. Render abstract Nouns by simpler concrete Nouns, or by Peri- 
phrases, or by Phrases with Verbs. See Paragraphs 3, 3a. 

3. Render English Metaphors by appropriate Latin Metaphors, 
See Paragraph 79. 

4. In a group of English short coordinate sentences, find out 
which is the most important and make that the principal, and the 
rest subordinate. See Appendix, page 164. 

<;. Find out the connection between each subordinate part of a 
sentence and its principal part, whether it be cause, contrariety, 
sequence, consequence, &c. and use the appropriate links. See 
Appendix. 

6. If there are any implied statements lurking in epithets, drag 
them out arid express them by clauses with approp7'iate links. See 
Appendix. 

7. Find out the connection of the first sentence with what {pro- 
bably) preceded, and then of each of the other sefitences with the 
sentence immediately preceding, and use the appropriate links. See 
Appendix. 



INTRODUCTORY EXERCISES. 



Exercise I. 



1. It is said (5) that Cato was (a man) of upright character. 

2. All of us, young and old, rich and poor, must die {5). 

3. Foolish (persons) are easily persuaded (to) any thing (6). 

4. We ought to believe good and honorable men (6). 

5. If one does one's best (8), one ought not to be blamed. 

6. No one of us is free from fault, but the better part of us 

(our nature) is divine (10). 

7. Caesar was on the point of (11) (in eo esse ut) taking 

the fort. 

8. The good men were loved, the rich were envied (11). 

9. While these things were going on (11) in France, Caesar 

was waging war upon the Britons. 
10. He did not let the enemy go till he had promised to ob- 
serve the treaty in future (n). 

Exercise II. 

1. They may (possibly) come to us to-morrow (12). 

2. Caius Julius ! you might help me, if you would (12). 

3. The enemy might return at any moment, and slay us all 

(12). 

4. Would that my faithful friend knew the danger I am in! 

(12). 

5. My friend ! you should not do this (= ought not to). 

6. Should they do this (12), they would deserve great blame. 

7. They must all have perished (12), if the brave sailor had 

not promptly (praesens) helped them. 






INTR ODUCTOR T EXERCISES. 133 

8. You must come from England to Boston over the sea (12). 

9. We must obey our parents, love our children, and fight for 

fatherland (12). 
10. You must not (12) fancy that you are believed, (when) 
speaking falsely (participle). 



Exercise III. 

1. The boy is like his father (13) (in appearance), but the gill 

is like her mother (in disposition). 

2. Caesar ordered (impero) the soldiers to attack the wall, 

but the camp-followers he ordered (jubeo) to remain in 
the camp. 

3. I am ashamed of my folly, repentant of my sins, and weary 

of life (130). 

4. It is our interest (13 a) that our country should be pros- 

perous. 

5. He said it was his (own) interest to do-good to all men. 

6. The herds are feeding-on rich pastures (130), but the men 

eat various food. 

7. The master teaches his pupils many (things), but the 

pupils conceal many (things) from the master (14). 

8. He takes-away the life of his enemy, and tears off the arms 

from his body (15). 

9. Terrified, the townsmen cast themselves at the feet of the 

conqueror (15, note). 

10. The travellers set out from Boston for the country : they 
spent five days in the country, and then returned to the 
city (16). 

Exercise IV. 

1. My sister lives in the splendid house of her father-in-law, 

but I dwell in my own house (16, end). 

2. Good children are (in the place of) a great joy to their 

parents (17). 

3. The bold lion fiercely resists his enemies, but the timid 

deer flees quickly (18). 



134 INTRODUCTORY EXERCISES. 

4. He besought his comrades not to desert him in this so 

great danger (19). 

5. That brave commander, Alexander, and that wise philoso- 

pher, Socrates, were formerly greatly praised (19, note). 

6. He said that Caesar was not the man to yield to danger or 

death (21). 

7. Cicero was the first to arise (21) in the Senate and accuse 

Catiline of dreadful crimes. 

8. Tall trees are first struck by lightning (21, 22), and a tall 

tree is-blooming in my meadow (22). 

9. No Christian (22) would-be-guilty-of (admitto in se) so 

foul a crime. 
10. The braver a man is, the more merciful is he towards the 
weak (=every bravest man, &c, 22). 

Exercise V. 

r. Idleness is a very-degrading vice (23). 

2. The horseman slew his embarrassed (impeditus) enemy 

with a sword (24). 

3. Cicero upbraided Catiline with great bitterness (24). 

4. In appearance he was a lover of his country, in reality a 

lover of himself (24). 

5. In the judgment of all good men, he is convicted of base 

deceit (24). 

6. We have been waiting at home for you, dear George, now 

many days (25). 

7. The Gauls are said to have been naturally more impetuous 

than firm (25). 

8. The King gave his faithful body-guard (satelles) a great 

reward for his so great services (27). 

9. The exiled Emperor lived for several years in England, 

near London (27). 

10. For the last twenty years, many wars have been carried on 
in Europe and America (27). 



INTRODUCTORY EXERCISES. 135 



Exercise VI. 

1. The city was taken in the fourth year after it had begun 

to be besieged (28). 

2. Trees and flowers bloom in summer, but decay and wither 

in winter (28). 

3. What is the price of wheat in the market to-day ? Seven 

dollars (29). 

4. The good citizen values money and magistracies highly, 

but virtue and integrity more highly (29). 

5. The saucy boy snapped his fingers and said, " I don't care 

a straw for you " (29). 

6. The King of the Cappadocians, (while) rich in slaves, was 

without money (31). 

7. Relying on (32) the valor of his army, Louis (Ludovicus) 

Napoleon waged war on Germany. 

8. The boy was born in high station, and is descended 

from noble ancestors (32). 

9. Desire of glory and wealth are great incitements to under- 

going (gerundive) dangers (23). 
10. A good general has need of valor, of prudence, of great 
experience in warfare (33). 

Exercise VII. 

1. The harbor of Boston (adj.) is capable-of-holding (34) 

many war-ships and merchant-vessels (navis oneraria). 

2. The wise-man is no less firm of purpose than capable-of- 

restraining (=powerful-over) evil desires (34). 

3. Cicero was unjustly-accused of tyranny and cruelty, but 

Catiline was justly condemned for treason and parri- 
cide (36). 

4. It-is-the-characteristic-of a prudent-man to deliberate care- 

fully about important matters, and of a foolish-man to 
act rashly (38). 

5. This State is bounded on the east and south by the Atlan- 

tic Ocean (39). 



136 INTRODUCTORY EXERCISES. 

6. William Evarts, the illustrious lawyer, departing from his 

home at Boston, fixed his abode at New York (Ebora- 
cum-novum) (39). 

7. The Germans attacked the army of Caesar in front and 

rear on its march (39). 

8. The rest of the Carthaginian ships were taken in the 607th 

year after the foundation of the city (40). 

9. Before the Birth of Christ, many wonderful portents ap- 

peared (40). 

10. The traveller arose by night, and about nightfall arrived 
at home (41). 

Exercise VIII. 

(For this amd the fifteen following Exercises, refer to 41, The 
Prepositions). 

1. Do not try to do any thing beyond your strength. 

2. The brave leader and above three hundred soldiers were 

lately slain by the Indians. 

3. My friend, strive to be above deceit. 

4. According to Thucydides, the Athenians managed their 

affairs ill. 

5. The good and the bad will each be rewarded according to 

their deeds. 

6. Immediately after his consulship, Cicero set out for his 

country-house. 

7. After your letter, mine was immediately read. 

8. After the manner of bandits, they plundered all things, 

public and private. 

9. We ought all to live agreeably to nature. 

10. The orator speaks as agreeably as possible to the truth. 

Exercise IX. 

1. We justly esteem cowardice among the basest vices. 

2. The battle of Cannae (adj.) was memorable amongst 

Roman defeats. 



INTRODUCTORY EXERCISES. 137 

3. He was .the only young man among many who won for 

himself fame. 

4. The victorious general divided all the booty among his- 

men (sui). 

5. The city, taken by storm, was at the mercy of the con- 

querors. 

6. At the beginning of the battle, the enemy were courageous 

and elated ; at the end, they were cast down and dis- 
pirited. 

7. Is your dear daughter at the point of death ? 

8. The beautiful lady held a looking-glass before her 

9. Fifty tried warriors were on guard before the Praetorian 

gate. 
10. Through the whole of life, death and disease present them- 
selves before the eyes of mortals. 

Exercise X. 

1. Verres was brought to trial before the jury, at the instance 

of Cicero (= Cicero being accuser). 

2. The captive Gaul boldly made (habeo) a speech before the 

general. 

3. Sulla died nineteen years before the Consulship of Cicero. 

4. The slanderer is beneath the notice of honorable-men. . 

5. What you say, my dear son, is beside the mark. 

6. The heavy rains had caused the river to swell beyond its 

bounds. 

7. That so good a man should utter-falsehoods is beyond 

belief. 

8. The city praetor will, beyond question, be brought to trial 

for extortion. 

9. The Sabines, making an onset, all but took the city. 

10. What else is the history of a nation, but the history of 
men % 



138 JNTRODUCTORT EXERCISES. 



Exercise XI. 

1. Maecenas had a splendid country-seat by the Anio. 

2. When the messengers arrived, my sons and daughters were 

sitting by me. 

3. My son came to Boston by sea, but the journey is now 

generally performed by land. 

4. As often as she was by herself, the widow bitterly mourned 

for her dead husband. 

5. The robber committed the robbery by himself. 

6. Our friend will set out for London on the 1st of May, and 

will return home by the 15th of October. 

7. Caesar was informed by spies that the Helvetii had set out 

from home with all their forces. 

8. Some ancient writers said that Ireland was less by a half 

than Britain. 

9. By Heaven ! I implore you, do not commit so great a 

crime ! 
10. By what you say, the last hope is now lost to us. 

Exercise XII. 

1. The Helvetians thought their territories too small, consid- 

ering their numbers. 

2. During four years, he used to call upon me twice or thrice 

a month. 

3. During the night, my uncle saw a terrible dream. 

4. During the reign of Charles I., the great English Rebellion 

occurred. 

5. During the reign of George III., the American Provinces 

gained their liberty. 

6. We are delighted with our house, except that it is not 

large enough. 

7. While I was dwelling in the country for two years, I sent 

no letter except to you. 

8. All bitterly abused me, with the exception of one, or, at 

most, two. 



INTRODUCTORY EXERCISES. 139 

9. Exclusive of his personal property, the wealthy merchant 
has left his wife large estates. 

10. Exclusive of many vices, Catiline, according to Sallust, 
was guilty-of foul crimes. 



Exercise XIII. 

1. The barbarians of the Southern (australis) Islands used 

small shells for money. 

2. The fanciful-man (says Horace) exchanges round-build- 

ings for square. 

3. Let us fight bravely for our wives, for our children, for out 

fatherland ! 

4. I fear greatly for you, my son, but not at all for myself. 

5. For Heaven's sake ( = by the gods I beseech you) come 

quickly and help me ! 

6. The dishonest judge took bribes for deciding a suit con- 

trary to evidence. 

7. He had been chosen for the magistracy, which had been 

appointed for the following year. 

8. It is my intention to set out for Rome on the 20th of 

August. 

9. I will wait for a longer time even than you have asked for. 

10. Out of many such deeds, this one will perhaps serve for 
an example. 

Exercise XIV. 

1. For my part, I intend to go to the country at the begin- 

ning of next summer. 

2. The soldiers in the camp are suffering severely for want of 

provisions. 

3. As for the physician whom you mention in your letter, I 

know nothing about him. 

4. For success that youth is both too trifling and too idle ! 

5. Take courage, worthy (excellent) friend : there is no cause 

for despair ! 

6. For all I know, the excellent poet has perished at sea. 



140 INTRODUCTORY EXERCISES. 

7. Be assured you are no match for that strong and active 

wrestler. 

8. So much for that matter ! Now let us turn our thoughts 

to other things. 

9. It were better for many guilty-men to escape (avoid) pun- 

ishment, than for one innocent-man to be condemned to 
death. 

10. He writes with such care that it is rare for him to make 

even a single blot. 

Exercise XV. 

1. From his boyhood, he was eagerly-desirous of learning. 

2. From the time when I returned home from England, I have 

suffered severely with tooth-ache and head-ache. 

3. From (being) poor, our friend has suddenly become rich. 

4. From Romulus's name (says the legend) the city was 

named Rome. 

5. The French nation now is different from what it once was, 

under the great Emperor. 

6. Messengers came from Carthage to Hannibal to warn him 

not to return home. 

7. The German monarch wrested his kingdom from the Em- 

peror of the Franks. 

8. Rest from labor and care comes only to the dead. 

9. He generally comes into the city to buy supplies once in 

seven days. 

10. Both in Herodotus and in Homer we find many incredible 
tales. 

Exercise XVI. 

1. The Great Desert of Sahara extends about nine hundred 

miles in width, and three thousand in length. 

2. The orator exhorted the assembly in this manner for more 

than two hours. 

3. Paul, the famous Apostle, was born at Tarsus, was put in 

prison at Philippi, and suffered death at Rome. 



INTRODUCTORY EXERCISES. 141 

4. In my judgment, said Clearchus, the traitor deserves to be 

put to death. 

5. If we wish to live in accordance with Nature, we must live 

in the country. 

6. In addition to this, he had great patience and wonderful 

fortitude. 

7. In case of your father's death, what will you children do ? 

8. In comparison with those dwelling in hotter countries, we 

deserve to be considered happy. 

9. In consequence of the defeat at Cannae, great fear came* 

upon the Romans. 
10. Catiline was going in the direction of Gaul, when Q. Metel- 
lus Celer met him. 

Exercise XVII. 

1. His liberality, skill in warfare, and good-fortune were in 

favor of Caius Caesar. 

2. It is said that the Emperor wishes to abdicate in favor of 

his son. 

3. In the midst of the enemy, many of whom he had slain 

with his own hand, lay the leader stabbed with a sword. 

4. The eloquent senator spoke long and vehemently in oppo- 

sition to the proposal. 

5. In point of numbers the Swiss nation is weak, but in point 

of valor it is very strong. 

6. Americans spare no toil in the search-after riches. 

7. Your son is not deficient either in respect of natural-ability 

or in knowledge. 

8. In spite of all the brave citizens could do, the city was 

taken by assault. 

9. In spite of the intercession of many powerful men, the 

murderer was hanged on the gallows. 

10. Pythias was instead of a brother to Damon, and they were 
mutually willing to die, each for his friend. 



142 INTRODUCTORY EXERCISES. 

Exercise XVIII. 

1. Scotland is on the north-east of Ireland. 

2. The enemies' army is within ten miles of the city. 

3. The active father said to his idle son, " This comes of lazi- 

ness." 

4. To come of good parentage ought to be a stimulus t > good 

deeds. 

5. They found in the camp many vessels of gold and silver. 

( Turn two ways. ) 

6. There are many men of ability, but only few of great 

ability. 

7. Very few of us now survive who remember the famous 

general. 

8. The Battle of Cannae was near (did not want much of) 

bringing destruction to the City of Rome. 

9. Rooks build their nests in the tops of trees. 

10. Before rain, leaves and feathers float on the surface of the 
water. 

Exercise XIX. 

1. He ordered the captain not to stir a finger's breadth from 

that-spot (illinc). 

2. Many persons, shut in by snow in the midst of the moun- 

tains, perished of hunger. 

3. News of the death of the general and his brave soldiers 

was first brought by an Indian scout. 

4. I greatly desire to ascertain what has become of my class- 

mate, who went many years ago to India 

5. What think you of the measures which have recently been 

brought before the Senate ? 

6. Huntsmen and warriors ought to be swift of foot, ready of 

wit, keen of eye, and bold of hand. 

7. In the year 479 B.C., a great-sea-battle between the Greeks 

and Persians took place off Mycale. 

8. Many tombs of illustrious men are still standing on the 

Appian Road. 



INTRODUCTORY EXERCISES, 143 

9. Sardanapalus, as he rushed-forth to meet the enemy, had 
a wreath on his head, and a sword in his right-hand. 

10. Vienna (Vindobona) is on the Danube, 340 miles from 
Berlin (Berolinum). 

Exercise XX. 

i. Or *he north, Spain is bounded by the Pyrenees Moun- 
tains, on the west by the Atlantic Ocean. 

2. Caesar and Ariovistus held a conference on horseback. 

3. We heard the poet playing skilfully on the lyre. 

4. The Spartan soldier was carried home to his mother on his 

own shield. 

5. When Darius was on the point of death, he wished both 

of his sons to come to him. 

6. The Senators were mostly on Pompey's side, the common- 

people on Caesar's, and many cautious men were on 
neither side. 

7. On the side of the Helvetii, the mountain gradually slopes 

down to the plain. 

8. My friend excuses himself from coming to my house on 

the plea of health. 

9. Bad men obey the laws, not willingly, but out of fear. 
10. Boys often inflict injury, not on purpose, but out of fun. 

Exercise XXI, 

1. The famine in Egypt lasted many years (over many). 

2. Hannibal the Carthaginian, (while) very young, was set 

over the army. 

3. The Isle of Man is over against Britain on the west. 

4. It was owing to the rashness of Lentulus to a great extent 

(magnopere) that Catiline's Conspiracy did not suc- 
ceed. 

5. Pending the giving of judgment, the defendant had com- 

mitted suicide. 
% 6. Themistocles persuaded his countrymen (civis) to build a 
broad and high wall round Athens. 



144 INTR OD UC TOR Y EXER CISES. 

7. The Sabines sent ambassadors round to the neighboring 

States to excite them to war against the treacherous 
Romans. 

8. Ever since America won her freedom (se in libertatem 

vindicare), she has been increasing in riches, fame, and 
power. 

9. Never since the creation of the world have arts flourished 

more than in the present day (= these times-). 

10. It was chiefly through his wealth that Tarquinius Priscus 
rose to be King of Rome. 

Exercise XXII. 

1. My friend will set out from Boston on the 1st of August, 

and will go first to Italy, then to Smyrna, and lastly to 
the Crimaea. 

2. The German Empire extends from the Baltic Sea to the 

shores of the Adriatic. 

3. Our soldiers fought with the Indians to a late hour in the 

day, when they were overwhelmed by superior numbers 
(multitudo) of enemies. 

4. Having slain many of the enemy, the small band of Ameri- 

can soldiers was slain to a man. 

5. To what end do you utter so many-words, which have no 

bearing on (nihil pertinens) the subject. 

6. The orator mounting the rostra, whence he had so often 

before harangued the people, spoke to this effect. 

7. To be dutiful to (one's) parents, loyal to (one's) father- 

land, faithful to friends, firm towards foes are (the char- 
acteristics) of a good citizen. 

8. To the best of his power Hector defended Troy against 

the attacks of the Greeks. 

9. The cavalry, under Philip's command (abl. abs.) t charged 

suddenly towards the hills which look toward the east. 

10. Achilles felt towards Patroclus the love of a brother, and 

therefore exacted heavy vengeance for his death (= him 
slain). 



INTRODUCTORY EXERCISES. 145 



Exercise XXIIL 

1. Under the pretence of reconciling the alienated friends, by 

treacherous calumnies he rendered them more hostile to 
each other. 

2. The Servians under arms have invaded the Turkish (Tur- 

cicus) territories, and have fought some battles with 
poor success (male gererej. 

3. Under the appearance of a favor, he inflicted on his client 

a severe injury (= affected his client with). 

4. The Jews were continually fighting with one another, 

when they ought to have been lighting against the 
Romans. 

5. Having the wind with him, the merchant sailed quickly 

from Boston to Dublin (Eblana). 

6. I will do at once what you request, with all my heart. 

7. The decision of the suit rests-entirely with the chief judge 

8. With heaven's aid, we may (licet) hope to overcome all 

enemies, and surmount all dangers. 

9. Cicero, with his usual wisdom, defended both the city and 

himself against the desperate (perditus) conspirators. 

10. The boy fell into the river and was within a very little of 
being drowned. 



146 INTRODUCTORY EXERCISES. 



Exercise XXIV. 

1. Without (75) attempting to conciliate (45) even his friends, 
he (2) succeeded in conciliating even his enemies. 

2. There is no doubt that (54) all the magistrates in the (16 
end) populous city (40) of Antioch (64), (2) conspired to dethrone 
the (18) just king Tullius. 

3. What reason have you (page 94) for saying that the (18) 
foolish young Balbus will not return (16) to Corinth ? 

4. I am (6) persuaded that you are wrong and (45) nothing 
shall persuade me (page 89) to believe otherwise. 

5. I will help you if T (par. n, page 8) can, but I fear youi 
friends will (49) not help you, and, if (70) so, there is no doubt 
(49) that you (49) will be banished. 

6. (51) Whether this is true or false, it does not persuade me 
(page 89) to believe that (18) the excellent Balbus is guilty. 

7. I will ask him (51) whether he (64) wished to remain at (i6)» 
Carthage, or to set out for (16) Rome. 

8. He says the bird will never (page 98) grow tame (mitesco), 
as long as it ( 1 1 ) is kept in a cage. 

9. I fear (49) (64) he wished to converse with (page 56) me. 

10. There is no doubt (49) that he (64) promised to come to 
(16) Athens, (44a) but he did not perform (53) what he promised. 

11. The (18) sagacious husbandman said the weather (dies, 
pi. ) would (page 98) grow cold (frigesco). 

12. I (2) expect that (51) whether he comes to Rome or re- 
mains at Naples he will not be (2) secure. Nothing (hint* 7 and 
appendix) but his (3a) departure from Italy will satisfy me. 
(Turn by ita ... si discesserit : see page 49.) 

13. After the (18) thoughtless Tullius (11) had asked me (page 
89) to dine with (page 56) him, he (page SS) promised to dine 
with Balbus in the same day. 

The reference is to the hints on page 131. 



GRADUATED EXERCISES. 147 

14. Did not you read the (19) two (binas) long, interesting 
letters ( liter se) (54 end) that my good friend Tullius sent me ten 
days (page 35) before his death? 

15. The hot-tempered (11) captain (hint 4 and appendix) 
perceived (21) the treachery that was intended, (47) and answered 
(oage43) in haste, (Oratio Recta, 78) "Do not (12) send mes- 
sengers to these (19) blood-thirsty people. (Hint 7 and appendix. ) 
The citizens have sworn to admit nobody. (Hint 7 and appendix.) 
of you (12) will send some one, don't send anyone you have a 
liking for. Send a bachelor." 



1. I fear the prodigal (18) Balbus will die within a week. If 
so, all (54) that he has will be sold, and (45) nothing will be left 
to support his child. But the man has no cause (75) for finding 
fault with anyone but himself; for, after {postquam) he had (66) 
squandered his father's patrimony, instead of (75) working (24) 
with vigour, he left his family (2) at Rome (16) without (41) 
money to (73) buy them bread, while (67) he travelled from 
Rome to (16) Milan, and from Milan to Paris, begging from 
(7) anyone that he met on (39) the way. I have often entreated 
him to (73) improve, but all in vain. 

2. What reason had you for finding fault in this way with 
your kind and considerate uncle Tullius? He did his best to 
help you, and would have done more, if you had not refused to 
obey him. I fear that in ten months' time you will repent, when 
too late, of your disgraceful ingratitude ; meantime I entreat 
you to remember your promise to improve. You have not 
much time to fulfil your promise, for he writes to me that, when 
he arrives at Naples, he intends to sell his estate there and to 
return to Rome with speed. (75, 70, 49, page 89, 11, 16.) 

3. There is no doubt that if he pities us, he will be a great 
protection to us in these sad calamities ; and indeed the town 



148 GRADUATED EXERCISES. 

has now been surrounded by the enemy with a ditch, so that 
I fully expect that it will be captured in ten days from this 
time. If our spies had warned us of this before the enemy came 
to Naples, we should have been able to resist them with some 
chance of success ; but, as it is, I fear that we shall be captured 
or put to death to a man. One thing I wish to know before 
you go, viz. on what day the general promised to send a messenger 
to the town of Nola. (n, 12, 2, 64, 16.) 

4. The excellent Balbus, when in his old age, while studying 
Greek at Corinth, used to say that " he was afraid he should not 
succeed, like Cato, in learning a new language, for his memory 
failed him and his old energy had gone." And indeed, although 
some one in Cicero says that he has no fault to find with old age, 
we certainly must not expect to retain all the vigour of youth. 
So do not promise to perform when old, what you have neglected 
when young. I have often asked how old Balbus was when he 
began Greek ; but I could never ascertain his exact age. But 
I believe he was over seventy. (18, 70, 2, page 98, 12, 54, 64.) 

5. Although my kind friend Tullius promised to help me, he 
forgot his promise. The consequence was that (tit ) I was left, 
while a boy, at Rome, without money to take me home ; and 
there was no one to help me in my sore distress. Indeed, if the 
worthy Balbus had not seen and pitied me, I do not know 
what I should have done. His enemies used to say that he loved 
no one, and that no one loved him ; but he asked me to come 
home with him, and treated me all the time I was in his house, 
like a man of humanity, as he was, with kindness and con- 
sideration. (76, 18, 70, 73, 45, page 77, 60, 24.) 

6. I don't know whether there is anything more agreeable 
than to hear one's praises uttered by some one who is free from 
flattery. The following remark of Cicero illustrates this better 
than a thousand treatises on flattery: — "The most subtle 
flattery," says that author, "is to tell your friend that he is 
above flattery, and to say that you do not know how to flatter 
him." It happened once that a Roman senator, named Lentulus, 
had a needy obsequious Greek fellow dining with him, who 
tried in vain to flatter his host. Lentulus laughed at his 
awkward attempts, and said, {Orat. Red.) "I flatter -myself, 
sir, that I am indifferent to flattery." (Orat. Red.) "Had I 
known that," replied the Greek, "I should have known how 



GRADUATED EXERCISES. 149 

to flatter you, but you have taught me a good lesson, and I will 
not forget it." (8, 25, 12, 46.) 

7. Almost all the men in the ship, when they saw nothing but 
rocks and waves before them, thinking that the boat was not fit 
for use, flung themselves into the sea and swam towards different 
parts of the beach. But all to a man perished. Only the sailors 
in the boat managed to escape to the shore. When they had 
reached it, they asked the natives to grant them food, clothing, 
and shelter : for they had nothing, not even a morsel of bread, 
to satisfy their hunger. But, instead of friends, they f nind 
robbers drawn up to meet them on the besHi: they were then 
deprived even of the little clothing they had, some of 'hem 
were beaten, some of them threatened with death, one was 
killed. In this extreme misery they were met by a band of three 
thousand soldiers coming from the capital, which was ten miles 
off. The commander of this force received them with kindness, 
asked them whether the-' wished to go on to the capital or to 
return at once to their country; and, upon their deciding on 
the former alternative, ordered that each should receive ten 
pounds (Orat. Red. and Orat. Obi.). "Wbt more," he 
added, " can I do for you ? Only say and it shall be done." 

8. In these great calamities, the brave and intrepid general, 
instead of manifesting fear, turned to his dejected soldiers and 
said, {Orat. Obi), "Courage! all will be well! We shall 
succeed past expectation, if we do our best to teach the enemy 
that they can be resisted by brave men. Why do we delay 
here in idle conversation when we ought to be up and doing ? 
I am informed that 20,000 infantry, 4,000 cavalry, and fifteen 
ships of war have been despatched against us ; but do not 
fear them, for, while they are mercenaries, we are free men. 
The enemy will certainly not pity you, and there is no hope but 



9. On the receipt of this sad news, the two generals, with 
joyful looks intended to disguise their feelings, began to ask their 
guide how much stronger the enemy was than their own army. 
On hearing that the Athenians had 3,000 more infantry than 
they had, one of them turned to the other and said {Orat. Rect. 
and Orat. Obl.) t "It is all over with these exultant soldiers of 
ours, if, instead of retiring, we march forward to Athens. You 
see, by these two letters in my hand, that our largest army 



150 GRADUATED EXERCISES. 

was yesterday defeated, almost all that survived were captured, 
and no one but the consul returned to tell the tale. Though 
the Athenians are treacherous enemies, they have no lack of 
bravery, and I fear that, if we do not retreat, we shall repent." 
After hearing these words, the other general asked for time to 
deliberate before making up his mind what ought to be done. 

io. The celebrated Caius was once asked whether the man 
that believed nobody, or the man that believed everybody, was 
the wiser. He answered, that every virtue was a mean between 
two vices : that it was possible for us to believe too much, as 
well as to believe too little {Orat. Obi.). " Cannot anyone see 
that it is the duty of a wise man to distinguish between those 
that are worthy, and those that are unworthy of credit ? for it is, 
and always will be, a part of virtue not merely to desire to do 
right, but also to determine what is right. ,, While the wise 
Caius was saying this, his pupils listened with attention. After 
he had finished, some of them remained behind to ask him the 
meaning of what he said ; others said that there was no truth 
in it ; others left without saying a single word themselves, or 
thinking in the slightest degree about what had been said by 
their teacher. 

ii. In the war with the Germans, this cruel and arbitrary king, 
being desirous of making, in the night-time, some alterations in 
his camp, ordered that, tinder pain of death, neither fire noi 
candle should be burning in the tents after a certain hour. He 
went round the camp himself, to see that his orders were obeyed: 
and as he passed by Captain Tullius' tent, he perceived a light. 
He entered., and saw the captain seal a letter, which he had just 
finished writing to his wife, whom he tenderly loved. {Orat. Obi.) 
"What are you doing there?" said the king. "Do not you know 
the.orders?" Tullius threw himself at his feet, and begged for 
mercy, but he had no power, and made no attempt, to deny his 
fault. {Orat. Red.) "Sit down," said the king to him, "and 
add a few words that I shall dictate." The officer obeyed, and 
the king dictated, {Orat. Obi.) "To-morrow I shall perish on the 
scaffold." Tullius wrote it, and he was executed the next day. 

12. Amid the shouting of the soldiers the voice of the general 
was distinctly heard as he encouraged those who were advancing 
to the charge, and rebuked the fugitives (Orat. Obi). " Why," 
he cried, "are you retreating? Do you hope to find safety in 



GRADUATED EXERCISES. 15 

flight? Do you not know that even the timid deer does not 
always flee ? On the one side lies the sea ; and on the other the 
enemy. Death is on both sides of you — choose between a death 
of honour and a death of shame. If even now you do not fight 
for your country, it is all over with the glory of Rome." On 
hearing these words, all the best of the soldiers recovered their 
spirits, closed their ranks, and charged the enemy with fierce- 
ness. The latter, unprepared for this sudden attack, fled some 
in one direction, some in another ; none were spared, and not 
a man out of that vast multitude was left to carry back home the 
news of the sad result. 



13. To this the general answered that he could not help recol- 
lecting the great cruelty with which his soldiers had been treated 
by the enemy at the taking of Nola, seven years ago(Orat. Obi.). 
"Now," he said, "nothing but compassion prevents me from 
destroying all of you to a man. You have not enough food to 
satisfy you, not enough even to keep off famine. Whether you 
are assisted by the Romans or not, it matters little ; all of you 
must perish." Upon this, the ambassadors, bursting into tears, 
promised that their countrymen should give all they had to the 
soldiers if only their lives were spared. They did not say that 
they had not deserved death ; for if they had said so, it would 
have been of little use : but they flung themselves at the general's 
feet, and again and again begged for pardon. He heard them in 
silence, without raising them, or appearing in any way to ■ be 
touched by their calamities. 



14. {Orat. Obi.) "If," said tne vvise shepherd, "you had 
observed the weather, as you promised to do, and had not forgotten 
the instructions I gave, you would not have come into this painful 
position. When, about a couple of weeks ago, an inundation took 
place, all the shepherds that were in the neighbourhood collected 
in haste and came to me for advice. On receiving my advice, 
they thanked me for the pains I had taken, and assured me they 
would carry out all that I had recommended. Consequently, 
although another storm visited us in the following week, scarcely 
anyone was injured, and I do not believe that you will lose a single 
sheep for the future, if you will adopt the same course as they did. 
Instead of weeping, give up your folly. Why did you come here 
but to get advice? and why are we sent into the world but 
to battle with troubles like these ? " 



152 GRADUA TED h XERCISRS. 

15. When the renowned Balbus, who had conquered Persia, 
Tartary, and Syria, was defeated by Tullius, and taken prisoner, 
he sat on the ground, and a soldier prepared a coarse meal to 
appease his hunger. As this was boiling in one of the pots used 
for the food of the horses, a dog put his head into it, but, from 
the mouth of the vessel being too small, he could not draw it out 
again, and ran away with both the pot and the meat. The 
captive monarch burst into a fit of laughter : and, on one of his 
guards demanding what cause upon earth could induce a person 
in his situation to laugh, he replied {Orat. Obl.) t " It was but 
this morning the stewaid of my household complained, that three 
hundred camels were not enough to carry my kitchen furniture ; 
now it is carried with ease by that dog, who hath carried away 
both my cooking instruments and dinner." 

16. On hearing this, the passionate queen replied in a fury 
{Orat. Rect.)> "I am surprised that I have not persuaded you that 
the course I recommended is the best under the circumstances, and 
I regret that you seem to have forgotten the great kindnesses you 
have received from me and from my predecessors on the throne." 
Then, growing more and more angry as she proceeded ( Orat. Obi. ) 
" For what purpose," cried she, " have we marched here but to 
fight the enemy ? Do you wish to give up your rights and liberties 
to the detestable Balbus ? Although I cannot dictate to you the 
course you should follow, I entreat you to listen to me when I 
appeal to you, in the name of the national honour, not to desert me 
in this degrading position. Why did you promise to obey me, if 
you did not intend to keep your word ? What have you asked 
of me that you have not obtained ? Prepare, I beseech you, to 
conquer or to die. If I had known that you wished to surrender 
the city, I would never have come on this disgraceful journey." 

17. {Orat. Obi.) "Can I ever fail," said the grateful Tullius, 
"to recollect the favours I have received at your hands ? Depend 
upon it, I will do my best to deserve success, even though I can- 
not attain it ; and you shall have no cause to regret the kindness 
you showed me in my many severe troubles. But why do I 
delay when I am called elsewhere by duty. Farewell ! " The 
wise old judge replied as follows : —{Orat. Red. ) " I am indeed glad 
to hear what you say, and nothing will make me believe that you 
are ungrateful. I advise you and your friends, instead of trying 
any longer to conciliate Balbus, to collect together at once and 
oppose him. I am sure he will never be persuaded by mere 



GRADUATED EXERCISES, 153 

ar^iment. and if he is not put down in a few months, you will 
be seriously injured by him." 

18. As the- agents of the infamous queen were conducting her 
unfortunate husband to the strong castle, ten miles off, at Cumse, 
the scene of his tragic and sorrowful end, it came into their minds 
that to prevent his being recognized by the peopie on the road, 
it would be well to have his head and beard shaved. They ac- 
cordingly commanded the prince to aiight from his horse, 
obliging him to sit down on a mound by the wayside ; meanwhile 
one of the escort, who officiated as barber, brought a basin of 
cold water taken out of the next ditch, observing to the king that 
" for that time any water must do." The prince, deeply affected, 
burst into a flood of warm tears, and seeing them fali into the 
basin, he pathetically observed {Or at. Obi.), "Behold, monsters, 
nature supplies what you would deny." 

19. On hearing this the impetuous soldier, with his sword 
drawn, rushed into the midst of his rebellious comrades, and cried 
at the top of his voice {Orat. Obi.), "Why do we stay here in 
this narrow camp, waiting for the enemy to crush us ? Why do 
we continue to obey an incapable general ? Did not you thank me 
for the bravery I showed in representing your claims to the 
general ? And did you not promise to join me ? Collect then at 
once, and in haste. Seize the officers. Instead of delaying, adopt 
the same course as our comrades in France ten days ago adopted, 
and you will have no cause to regret the result. Success is 
certain if you but do your best. Are you not ashamed of the 
disgraceful position in which you have been placed for more than 
a fortnight ? " Here he paused for a moment, and then added, 
with bitterness {Orat. Red.), "Perhaps some one will say we 
must not forget the oath of fidelity we have sworn to our generals. 
We will not forget it, on condition they remember the duty of 
kindness towards us." 

20.. In the midst of all these terrible disasters the brave 
general was the only man that retained his presence of mind. 
Collecting a few of the most resolute men in the army, he 
reported them to act with energy, and not to forget the great glory 
that awaited them if they could only force their way through the 
enemy and reach a place of security {Orat. Obi.), "Why," 
said he, " do you despair, when I am your leader ? Has the 
enemy any reason to boast of having ever defeated me ? It is not 



1 54 GRAD UA TED EXERCISES. 

the enemy that I fear, it is your timidity and irresolution. Before 
you came to Naples you acted with the courage of soldiers ; 
now, you are in some strange way altered, and I do not know 
what is the matter with you ; if you had marched with speed, 
you would now be in Rome, and not a man there wouM dare 
to oppose you. " 

21. Remembering the cruelty with which their countrymen had 
been treated by the enemy, the ambassadors came most unwill- 
ingly on their humiliating errand, and, after they had arrived at 
the capital and obtained an audience in the town-hall, no one 
liked to be the first to speak. At last the excellent Tullius broke 
silence with these words {Orat. Obi.) i — "Although we cannot 
expect indulgence, and do not ask you to pity us, yet we think it 
worth while to appeal to your sense of your own interest, and to 
ask you to give us time to consult our government as to whether 
we may surrender the city. Remember that it is sometimes pro- 
fitable to spare the vanquished, and that mercy is sometimes the 
mark of a politic as well as of a merciful man. The oldest of 
your nobles cannot have entirely forgotten the great calamities 
that befel you in the late war. What you have suffered once it 
is possible, if not probable, that you may suffer again. How- 
ever, if we cannot persuade you that our advice is the best, we 
are prepared to resist you to the last." 

22. {Oral. Obi.) "I was not so much injured by the wound," 
cried the intrepid soldier ; " it was the man's treachery in attempt- 
ing to stab me when off my guard that provoked and angered me. 
I thank you with all my heart for the great kindness you have 
shown me while ill, and now farewell. Believe me, I shall not 
find it easy to forget the many benefits you have bestowed on me 
in my severe trial. Why do not all men remember, as you do, 
the claims of hospitality and mercy ? Can I ever repay you for 
your trouble ? Never, except by imitating your conduct. Before 
I knew you, I was persuaded that every Roman was a knave ; 
now I know that wherever I go I shall find in all nations some 
goodness, kindness, and compassion : and nothing shall make 
me believe the contrary." 

23. At the unfortunate battle of Damietta against the Saracens, 
Louis IX. was taken prisoner. He bore this reverse of fortune 
so nobly and so magnanimously that his enemies said to him in 
admiration ( Orat. Red.), " We look upon you as our captive and 



GRADUATED EXERCISES. , 155 

our slave ; but though in chains, you behave to us as if we were 
your prisoners." The sultan having sent one of his generals to 
the king, to demand a very considerable sum of money for his 
ransom, his majesty replied, {Oral. Obi.) "Return, and tell 
your master, that a King of France is not to be redeemed with 
money : I will give him the sum he asks for my subjects that are 
taken prisoners; and I will deliver up to him the city of Damietta 
for my own person." And such were the terms on which the 
liberation of the King of France and his subjects was afterwards 
effected. 

24. A thousand promises cannot restore the reputation forfeited 
by one dishonourable act, ar.d it ought never to be forgotten that a 
readiness to make professions and promises often implies a readi- 
ness to break them. But, while we cannot help distrusting a 
man that seems to promise much and feel little, we ought to be 
on our guard against suspecting a man unduly. We ought to be 
wise, without being cruel or suspicious. A man of good feeling 
will do well to remember that he, as well as others, is liable to 
go wrong, and the precept that enjoins upon us not to judge lest 
we be judged will be always in his mind. If we remember this 
solemn precept, we shall be more likely to act not only with 
mercy but also with wisdom in our relations to our inferiors, and 
there can be no doubt that, in spite of apparent failure, gentle- 
ness will in the end succeed where cruelty will fail. 

25. {Orat. Red.) "Do you dare to say," cried the infuri- 
ated mutineers, "that the soldiers in the camp did not again and 
again entreat you to lead them against the enemy ? Have you 
anything to reply to this accusation ? If so, speak : if not, con- 
fess that you deserve death. " To these words the general replied 
(Orat Obi.), "I see that you are determined to murder me 
Yet my oldest lieutenant will bear me witness that I shewed 
my prudence in giving orders for a retreat. I had only 
2,000 men at that time with me. I did not know which of 
the two roads through the wood led to Rome. Upon my pro- 
posing a retreat to my officers, they all kept silence except two, 
who expressed their approval of it; and, in the end, it was unani- 
mously determined on. As for the prisoners, it is true that none 
were spared ; but the reason was that several tried to escape 
after they had promised not to depart from the camp. What 
more could anyone have done in that great calamity ? I for my 
part do not know, and I wish my accusers would each produce 
his own plan." 



156 GRADUATED EXERCISES. 

26. After inquiring why the principal men of wealth and 
importance in the town did not interfere to prevent these great 
tumults, Tullius unfortunately turned to the general Fabius and 
said {Orat. Rect.)^ "I am surprised that your country has not 
obtained more wisdom from its misfortunes. You asked me 
just now what we should have done if we had been conquered. 
I reply, we should at least have learned moderation." On 
hearing this, the general was filled with anger and replied {Oral. 
0&/.), " Why "do you make such absurd remarks? Can I or 
anyone avoid destiny ? What is the use of talking about what 
might have happened ? It serves no purpose but that of irritating 
the people. Cease to waste time in this way and depart from 
Rome with speed, taking your goods with you. If you do not, I 
promise to accuse you of treachery in three days, and you and 
thousands of spies like you shall be put to death." Tullius 
was persuaded that he meant what he said, and he therefore 
collected his goods, bade farewell to his family, and, after asking 
them to write to him as soon as possible, set out in haste for 
Egeria, a town about twenty-five miles distant. 

27. The wise and pious philosopher, turning to the rash and 
foolish youth, replied with calmness {Orat. Rect.), "If, while 
young, you do not pay attention to your work, you will find, when 
old, that you will have cause to repent your folly. There are many 
that are admired, while young, for their quickness, ingenuity, 
and taste, and, if they had determined to work with steadiness, 
they would have succeeded ; but, instead of doing so, they often 
waste their time in an idle and frivolous manner, and thus they 
are left far behind in the race of life by others of inferior ability 
but greater application." To this the young man replied in 
haste {Orat. Obl.)> " I have a great dislike to receive such lectures 
from you ; and there is no reason why you should select me in- 
stead of others, since others are as bad. Pray cease, if you don't 
wish me to leave the room. I shall go home to my friends in 
Italy at once. Can anything be more absurd than that a youth 
of ability like mine should continue to remain at school ? " 

28. It was customary with General Caius, when any of his 
soldiers were brought before him for heinous offences, to Say to 
them, " Brother, you or I will certainly be hanged;" which was 
a sufficient denunciation of their fate. Once a spy, who was dis- 
covered in his camp, was addressed in this language. Next day, as 
the poor wretch was about to be led to the gallows, he pressed 



GRADUATED EXERCISES. 157 

earnestly to speak with the general, alleging that he had some- 
what of importance to communicate. The general, being made 
acquainted with his request, said with roughness (Oral. Ob/.), 
"It is always the way with these rascals ; they pretend some frivo- 
lous story, merely to reprieve themselves lor a few moments : 
however, bring the dog hither." When he was introduced, the 
general asked him what he had to say. (Orat. Red.) " Why, my 
lord," said the culprit, "when I first had the honour of your con- 
versation, you were pleased to say that either you or I should be 
hanged ; now I am come to know whether it is your pleasure to 
be so, because, it you won't, I must; that's all." The general 
was so pleased with the fellow's lumour that he ordered him to 
be released. 

29. In this great perplexity I had recourse to the active, ener- 
getic Tullius, one of my most intimate and affectionate friends. 
I took him by the hand, informed him of the difficulty in which I 
was placed, and asked him to advise me what to do, and, ii 
possible, to assist me with money. He answered, with his usual 
kindness, " If you had asked me to help you on the 23rd of March 
I would have done so with pleasure, but now, instead of being 
able to help you, I want help myself. It is true that a few days 
ago I possessed friends, money, and arms ; but now I have not 
even food enough to last me and my children for seven days. 
Can you hope for help from me after hearing this ? " While he 
said this, the tears ran down his face. I felt the sorrow with 
which he was moved, and there was not a man present that 
did not feel it as much as I did. For my part, I turned away 
my face so as not to shew my feelings, and I told Tullius that I 
would only consent to tak~ the command of the army on con- 
dition that he had his property restored to him. 

30. I once heard a Frenchman and a German arguing to- 
gether as to which was the better country ; the former spoke of 
the successes in war that had been obtained by his nation, and 
enumerated the distinguished generals that had gained conquests 
innumerable. The German reminded the Frenchman of the 
discoveries in art and science that had been effected by h)S 
countrymen ; the beauty of their literature, the world-wide 
renown of their poets, their historians, and their philosophers. 
While they were thus arguing together, it happened that an 
Englishman came up, who put in a claim for his own country 
in the following words (Orat. Obi.) : — "Although we admit that 



158 GRADUATED EXERCISES. 

the Frenc<r have more taste, and the Germans have more depth 
than our own countrymen, yet still in practical ability we think 
that we are not inferior to any nation : for answer this question 
— What nation has succeeded like ours in administering its 
affairs at once in peace and prosperity ? " 

31. (Oral. Rett.) "If," said the philosopher, in answer to the 
question of his brave young son, "if, in our great calamities, we 
had been spared by the conquering Romans, perhaps we should 
have pitied them in turn. But, instead of pitying us, they treated 
us with cruelty on all occasions ; I am therefore much surprised at 
your regretting the rapidity with which the army of Carthage, 
under the leadership of Hannibal, conquered the armies of Rome." 
Seeing that his son kept silence, the old man went on as follows 
( Orat. Obi. ) : — " For my part, I am as happy to see the defeat of 
Rome, as the Romans were to see that of Spain fifteen years ago ; 
and I am sure, if you remember the past history of our nation, 
that you will feel it to be your duty to do everything you can to 
procure the defeat of the Romans and the success of the Cartha- 
ginians. If you agree with me, I am satisfied ; if not, I will 

. endeavour to prove, by narrating the history of the past war, that 
ambition, pride, avarice, and cruelty, must inevitably be the 
ruin of any nation, and that Rome can form no exception to 
this rule. " 

32. The angry and passionate queen, resenting the insult she 
had received from all the wealthiest inhabitants of the city, 
replied with bitterness (Oi-at. Obi.), "The most exalted genius is 
frequently overborne by envy. I am determined to do every- 
thing that I can to effect the ruin of this rebellious people, for I 
am certain that their wants will never be satisfied, and that 
until their wants are satisfied they will never cease rebelling. 
They would persuade me, forsooth, that the sovereign is made 
for the nation, instead of the nation being made for the 
sovereign ; they complain that I neglect public merit, and 
lavish the revenue of the state upon unworthy favourites, and that 
all the most important offices are bestowed by favour. For my 
part, instead of being moved to pity by such complaints as these, 
I shall collect my most faithful troops in haste ; I will then 
surround the city, arrest the ringleaders, banish some, fine others, 
kill others, and thus establish peace." 

33. It is said that even this hard and cruel tyrant was touched 
with gratitude at the haste with which the poor lame cobbler had 



GRADUATED EXERCISES. 159 

come to his assistance. After he had remarked that the favourites 
of kings were often the most deserving men in a country, he 
proceeded to describe the rebellion and the measures that 
had been taken to put it down {Orat. Red.). : *lf," he said, 
* ' my generals, instead of sparing the people, had destroyed all the 
forests in the country, broken down the bridges and burned the 
villages, we should in all probability have succeeded, and we 
should not now be obliged to ask for peace. We should 
not have before us the spectacle of a city so vast and beautiful 
as this, besieged on all sides by enemies whom it is impossible 
to resist, and equally impossible to persuade to peace." Then, 
turning to the bystanders, who displayed much emotion at his 
words, he said {Orat. Obi.), " Leave me; why do you delay? 
Make the best of your way to the nearest refuge, for there is 
nothing to prevent the enemy from at any time taking the city ; 
and, while I value your sympathy, I do not feel justified in en- 
dangering your safety." 

34. I cannot be persuaded that you have done wisely in 
not visiting the castle. It is a place worthy of being seen for 
its own sake, and 1 hardly think that any is more strongly 
fortified both by nature and art ; and to those who have read 
the chronicles of England it is rendered more memorable by a 
beautiful instance of filial piety. Two hundred years ago, the 
town was besieged and greatly straitened for want of provisions. 
No one could be found bold enough to undertake the dangerous 
task of conveying supplies thither, until a youth, whose father 
was in the garrison, came forward and accepted the duty. For 
several nights he crossed the lake, climbed the wall, and placed 
provisions at a spot where his father would find them. At 
length he was taken prisoner and sentenced to death, to strike 
terror into anyone who might be disposed to render similar help 
to the besieged. It was the good fortune of one of my own 
ancestors to obtain pardon for him. With considerable danger to 
himself, he procured an interview with the general, and addressed 
him pretty nearly as follows: — "Affection to a father is the 
source of patriotism. You cannot put the youth to death without 
also causing pain to every good son." Not to make a long 
tale, he succeeded in his prayer, and the youth was spared. For 
my part, ever since I heard this story. I have always felt proud of 
my ancestor's conduct, and never think of the old castle but with 
feelings of interest and pleasure. 



160 GRADUATED EXERCISES. 

35. During the wars in Flanders, in the reign oj" Queen Anne, 
when the Duke of Marlborough and Prince Eugene commanded 
the allied army, a soldier, in the division of the latter, was con- 
demned to be hanged for marauding. The man happened to be 
a favourite with his officers ; they therefore applied to the 
Duke of Marlborough, begging his grace to interfere. With his 
usual good nature, he accordingly went to Prince Eugene, who 
said {Orat. Obi.) he never did, and never would, consent to the 
pardon of a marauder. {Orat. Red.) "Why," said the duke, "at 
this rate, we shall hang half the army ; I pardon a great many." 
{Orat. Obi.) " That," replied the prince, "is the reason that so 
much mischief is done by your people, and that so many suffer 
for it ; I never pardon any, and therefore there are very few to be 
punished in my army." The duke still urged his request ; on 
which the prince said {Orat. Obi.), "Grant me this favour. 
Make inquiry which of us has executed most men, and if your 
grace has not executed more than I have done, I will consent to 
the pardon of this fellow." The proper inquiries were accord- 
ingly made, and it appeared that the duke had executed far more 
than Prince Eugene, on which he said to the duke ( Orat. Red. ), 
"There, my lord, you see what example can do. You pardon 
many, and therefore you are forced to execute many ; I never 
pardon one, therefore few dare to offend, and of course but few 
suffer." 



36. After Tullius had heard that the brave young soldier Balbus 
had returned to the town of Tarentia, forty miles distant, he 
went and visited him to see whether he was contented with his 
position in the army, and to ascertain how matters were going on 
in the camp. He was delayed for a day or two by the illness of 
an intimate friend, but three days after Balbus' return, Tullius 
arrived at Naples and called on Balbus. On seeing him, he 
addressed the young soldier thus {Orat. Obi.) : — "However 
much, my dear Balbus, I am gratified by the report of your 
many illustrious achievements, yet I feel that as long as you 
are in the army, your conduct can never entirely meet with 
my approval. For what, after all, is a soldier? He is a man 
that will cut anyone's throat for a shilling a day." Hereupon 
the impetuous Balbus replied in haste {Orat % ObL), "Why do 
you talk like this? Pray cease. Do you not know that a soldier 
may sometimes be one of the most deserving men in the country? 
Besides, whether your observations are true or false, they are sure 
to be useless, as long as human nature remains as it is." 



. 



GRADUATED EXERCISES. 161 

37. "We should not have taken these harsh measures," said 
the ferocious old general, ' ' against all the most respectable citizens 
in Rome, if we had not known for certain that the people in 
Rome will never be quiet, and will never submit to our dominion 
in peace." He then continued to speak as follows : — " Even all 
the brilliant successes of our army have been unable to convince 
the Italians that resistance is impossible, and that it is absolutely 
necessary for them to come to terms. There will always be 
found cruel generals and undisciplined and disobedient soldiers, 
and I confess that, although we have done our best to avoid 
injuring private individuals, yet the life of the agriculturists in 
Italy during the past four months has been by no means an 
enviable one. But did you not know when you went to war 
the risk you were incurring ? And did not we take up arms to 
improve our condition if possible ? Cease, then, from unavailing 
complaints." 

38. (Orat. Red.) " Look at my withered body," said the camel 
to Jupiter. " Why have you not given me the plumpness of the 
horse, the ox, and the elephant ? Why have you given me so few 
muscles, and made me so ugly? And why have you compelled 
me to dwell in a dry, barren, and flat country like Arabia ? " To 
these complaints Jupiter answered with a smile {Orat. 0b/.) f 
11 My excellent friend, you will find that I have a reason for all 
I have done. If I have made you lean and -deprived you of all 
superfluous muscles and flesh, it is because in the dry barren 
deserts of Arabia it is not possible to obtain much food. Why 
else did I give you this powerful jaw-bone except that you might 
chew the hardest nutriment ? For the same reason I gave you a 
small stomach to prevent your eating too much. And as for my 
obliging you to live in Arabia, how, with your fat, fleshy feet, 
could you ascend the heights of mountains, or walk without 
slipping in the mud of marshy districts ? Instead of talking any 
more nonsense, be kind enough to return to your work." 

39. (Orat Obi.) " If the matter is neglected longer," said the 
wise Tullius, "the country will not be safe. We ought not to 
hesitate in this great calamity to choose a general to meet the 
enemy before t^ey arrive at Rome ; and nobody, I think, will 
deny that we ought not to have hesitated when the Cartha- 
ginians were first collecting their forces. For when they were at 
the river, not more than ten miles off, would it not have been 
easy for us, even with a small number of men, to repel a regular 

M 



162 GRADUATED EXERCISES. 

army? We have lost an opportunity ; but now, without delaying 
longer, let us collect with speed our bravest citizens, and before 
the enemy advances further I hope to crush him with ease." 
When they heard this, the soldiers shouted for joy ; declared 
to a man that they would have Scipio for their general ; crossed 
the bridge with speed ; marched for three days through a waste 
district called Gergovia ; met the enemy suddenly near the Anio, 
and completely defeated them. 

* 40. When Field Marshal Balbus was taken prisoner at the battle 
of Corioli, a Numidian hussar, who seized him, perceiving that he 
had a valuable ring, said, "Give me your ring." The marshal 
instantly complied with the demand of the captor. A short time 
after, when he was liberated by General Tullius, and the 
Numidian hussar had become a prisoner in his turn, he with great 
unconcern drew the marshal's ring from his linger, and presenting 
it to him said {Orat. ObL), "Since fate has turned against me, 
take back this ring ; it belonged to you, and it would not be so 
well to let others strip me of it." Pleased with the honesty of 
the hussar, the marshal bade him keep the ring in remembrance 
of his having once had its owner for his prisoner. 

41. Without attending to the arguments of the merciful officer, 
the ferocious and passionate general replied {Orat. Red.), 
'* Whether you are speaking the truth or not, what you say has no 
effect upon me, and I never asked you whether it was your desire 
to spare the lives of the citizens of Corioli, a city that has done us 
as much harm as it possibly could. What I asked was, how soon 
it could be taken, for there is no doubt it will be taken sooner 
than people think. Now, instead of giving me advice, I order 
you, as I ordered you ten days ago, to collect all your bravest 
soldiers and to prepare for immediate action." On hearing this, 
the young man replied {Orat. Obl.) y " If I have spoken freely, 
it is because I am persuaded that unless you do your best to 
conciliate the men of Corioli, and unless you promise to send 
them back all the hostages they have given us, not merely will 
you lose the hope of success, but the very safety of the army 
will be in danger. You may blame yourself for your present 
misfortunes, for you might have managed matters very differently. 
If you had taken the advice I gave you, you would not now be 
in this great difficulty. Every town in Italy would favour you, 
and not a man would wish to oppose your progress. I know 
of my own knowledge, that 300 of the bravest men of Naples 
determined to help you on condition you did not storm Corioli " 






GRADUATED EXERCISES. 163 

42. (Or at. Obi.) "I may well complain of the neglect with 
which I have been treated by my best friends," cried the proud 
and passionate queen. " I have no one to help me, no one to 
advise me what to do in this great calamity. Instead of coming 
to this dangerous place I might have travelled with ease to the 
city of Athens, which is not more than thirty-two miles off, and 
if I had done so I should have escaped my cruel enemies, and now 
I should be in safety." On hearing this, the aged Tullius, the 
wisest of her nobility, said ( Orat. Obi. ), " Why does your majesty 
complain? For these last two years you have been desiring 
nothing so much as an opportunity for engaging with the enemy 
— a desire that is now on the point of being gratified. Now, 
therefore, that the opportunity has arrived, why do you delay 
to avail yourself of it ? Why does the army remain here inactive ? 
I ask your pardon for speaking with freedom, but if your majesty 
does ffot communicate to the officers the exact time at which you 
will fight to-morrow, and the army is not prepared for an 
immediate conflict, the mercenaries, with their usual fickleness, 
will desert your standard, and you cannot possibly hope to 
succeed." 

43. {Orat. Rect.) n I wish you would tell me," said the wise 
philosopher to the young man, "what is a worthy object to 
pursue through life." {Orat. OH.) " Tne first thing," said the 
young man, "that I should like to do, would be to succeed in 
business ; then, after amassing a considerable fortune, I should 
like to rise till I had become one of the principal persons in my 
neighbourhood ; then there are all sorts of prospects that would 
be open for me. With a little tact, and the judicious expen- 
diture of a little money, 1 could get into parliament ; and when 
a man is once in parliament, there is no limit to the career 
before him." {Orat. Rect.) "But what do you expect to do in 
parliament?" said the philosopher. {Orat. Rect.) "I should 
endeavour to create a sensation," replied the young man. {Orat. 
Obi.) " But do not you think," said the philosopher, " that such 
an object as this is unworthy of a really noble man ? Instead of 
endeavouring to make a sensation, had you not better find cut 
what work you are best fitted to do, and do that as well as you 
can ? Believe me, the highest object of a human being is to 
make the world a little better for his having lived, and not 
to make a sensation." 

44. When the Samnites under their brave king Tullius defeated 
the Etrurians in the battle of Cumae, the King of Etruria, seeing 



164 GRADUA TED EXERCISES. 

his troops flee, asked what was the number of the Samnites who 
were making all this slaughter ? He was told that it was only 
King Tullius and his men, and that they were all on foot. (Orat. 
Red.) " Then," said the crafty Etrurian, •' God forbid that such 
a noble fellow as King Tullius should march on foot," and sent 
him a noble charger. The messenger took it and said, {Orat. Obi.) 
" Sire, the King of Etruria sends you this charger, that you may 
not be on foot. Be pleased to accept it as a token of his respect.- 
The brave Tullius was as cunning as his enemy, and ordered one 
of his squires to mount the horse in order to try him. The squire 
obeyed : but the horse proved a fiery one, and the squire being 
unable to hold him in, he set off at full speed to the pavilion of 
the King of Etruria. The king expected he had caught King 
Tullius, and was not a little mortified to discover his mistake. 

45 . After he had with patience heard the rash young soldier 
make his defence, the general addressed him in severe tones as 
follows ( Orat. Obi.) : — " I feared some time ago that I had made a 
mistake in sending you to take the command of the forces in 
Rome, and now I know for certain that you are not yet fit for the 
command of a large army ; I shall therefore order you to return 
to your home ten days hence. You have pleaded that your 
intentions were good ; but that is not the question. There is 
no one but believes in the rectitude of your intentions, and thinks 
you honest and well-meaning ; but however well-meaning one 
may be, a man is not fit (to) for command without self-control, 
tact, judgment, and energy ; and these qualities you do not 
possess." The young man in sorrow replied (Orat. Red. ), " I have 
nothing more to say in self-defence ; I feel that I no longer deserve 
your confidence ; and though I am conscious that I meant well, 
yet I must admit that I ought not to have left the city against 
orders. If I had known my defects sooner, I should not have 
asked you to appoint me a general." 

46. (Orat. Red.) "Away with these compliments," said the 
grateful Balbus ; " the attachment between us is too great for it to 
be right, either that you should offer me thanks for any attention, 
or I you. I have not paid you an attention, I have repaid it. I 
think that I have received acknowledgment enough indeed, if 
what I have taken real pains to do be acceptable to you. There 
is no reason why you should thank me, if for your numerous 
uncommon kindnesses towards myself I have repaid you with 
this trifling service. So far from deserving praise, I should 



GRADUATED EXERCISES. 165 

have deserved to be considered most ungrateful if I had failed 
my friend. Whatever I possess, whatever can be done by my 
pains, reckon as much your own as your own property. I think 
that 1 have received a benefit in the kind construction you 
have put upon my service*. If you heartily approve my 
services, mind you make a more frequent use of them. I shall 
not believe that you are pleased with what I have done, unless, 
whenever you want anything of mine, you take whatever you 
like, instead of asking for it." 

47 . Amid a profound silence, the renowned and eloquent Tullius 
arose and spoke as follows {Oral. Obi.) : — " Why ao we delay? 
Is the crafty and cruel Balbus delaying ? Do we not know for 
certain that he is making it his object to betray his country? 
Beware of regarding your private interests and disregarding the 
interests of the public. If you delay, it is all over with the state ; 
either Rome or Balbus must fall : choose which shall perish." 
The senate heard the orator with admiration, adopted his 
opinion, and decreed that the consuls should provide for the safety 
of the country. On receiving this intelligence, the conspirators, 
in fear and trembling, betook themselves with all diligence to 
their respective homes, and none dared to utter so much as a 
word in opposition. They fled in different directions, seme to 
Sicily, some to Athens ; poor old Cathegus, now an old man of 
seventy-three, was the only one left at Rome. 

48. [Oral. Red.) "There is no doubt, " said the ferocious 
general, " that all that have been taken with arms in their hands 
will be banished ; for indeed it will be the height of folly, if 
men, who without any prospect of success rebel against their 
king, are spared, and allowed to go unpunished." To this the 
wise and merciful king replied with gentleness, but at the same 
time with firmness {Oral. Obi.), "There is certainly a great deal 
in what you say, and I recognize the zeal with which you have 
espoused my cause ; but remember that because a man pities the 
innocent, it does not necessarily follow that he is weak-minded. 
Indeed, oppression is as impolitic as it is cruel. Why, then, do 
we delay to throw open the prisons, and to allow all the 
best of the prisoners to return with speed to Rome, especially 
as they have not bread enough for :he people there ? I, for my 
part, will f ake care of the destruction of the bridge that spans 
the Tiber, and I hope that in a few days, by surrounding the city 
with a wall, we shall make the rebels see thac their position 
is untenable, and we shall induce them to lay down their arms.' 



\ 



166 GRADUATED EXERCISES. 

49. Tullius, turning with a look of contempt to Balbus, 
addressed him in these words \Orat. Red.) : — "I do not know 
what reason there is why you should think you may keep your 
own property, and use that of other persons. There never was 
any reason why you should think so. What would you have 
thought, if a man had violently entered your house, beaten 
your servants, insulted your family, taken your money and all 
your valuables, and refused to make satisfaction? But this is 
just what you have done. I ask you then with what decency 
you can attempt to excuse such conduct. Actions like these have 
made you so hated that there is not a man in your neighbourhood 
but would be delighted to hear 'of your death. Indeed, you have 
so alienated all, that even your friends without exception desert 
you. A man must be a villain indeed to be deserted by his 
friends, and not to have a single person to take his part. Where 
is your old reputation for spirit and courage which you had when 
a youth ? If you had a spark of courage, you would not bear 
such ignominy with tameness." On hearing this, the wretched 
Balbus, spite of his ordinary impudence, was touched with remorse. 
He went home, told his servant he was ill, shut himself up in his 
bedroom, made his will, took out of a chest a good stout rope, 
fixed a nail in the wall, fastened the rope to the nail, and hung 
himself — thus endeavouring to heal a life of error by one last 
fatal error. 



50. When the Gauls under the command of Brennus had got 
possession of Placentia, they carried their cruelty to their Italian 
prisoners to the severest extremities, making them work like 
horses at their mills, and in drawing water. The acute and 
learned Balbus, in his travels, relates that he met some of these 
unfortunate wretches on his first entrance into the city, who had 
been liberated that morning from their dungeon, and who were 
endeavouring literally to crawl to the village of Alma, which was 
but ten miles off. {0->at. Obi.) "The legs of these poor creatures 
w r ere sw r ollen to a size that was truly horrible, and their eyes 
were terrible from inflammation. Some, too weak to support them- 
selves, had fallen on the sand, where they were exposed to the 
scorching beams of the sun. Immediately on seeing Balbus and 
his companions, they uttered such moans as might have pierced 
the hearts of their cruel oppressors. They begged for water, but 
the travellers had none to give them : and all they could do was 
to prevail on one or two of the men of Alma to promise to take 
care of them until relief could be obtained. Of these unfortunate 






GRADUATED EXERCISES 167 

captives, upwards of forty perished every day from the miseries 
to which their conquerors exposed them." 

51 . The industrious and acute philosopher turned with calmness 
to the rash young man and said (Orat. Obi.), " I am surprised at 
your acting with such thoughtlessness and want of good feeling ; 
you have occupied now for ten years an honourable position in 
the estimation of all Rome, and you would now give up this 
position. Instead of paying attention to the duties of your 
office, you propose to bury yourself in a life of contemplation, 
and to desert your family. If ten days ago your best friends had 
known of your intention, and the haste with which you intended 
to leave them, they would all to a man have expressed to you the 
sorrow wiih which they received your determination. Give up 
then this hasty, thoughtless plan ; your friends will be delighted 
to receive you home. Did you not hear yesterday that your 
most faithful servants were seeking you everywhere ?" 

52. This great and illustrious general would soon have obtained 
all the help he wanted from his countrymen, and would have 
driven the enemy out of the country in disgrace, had he not been 
prevented by the arrival of his great adversary Tullius. As soon 
as the latter reached the camp he began to sow discontent among 
all the bravest soldiers. He went first to one, then to another, 
and endeavoured to pereuade them to mutiny by such words as 
these {Orat. Obi.) : — " Do you know that your general means to 
betray you into the hands of the enemy upon the first opportunity? 
If not, why is the camp placed in this disadvantageous position ? 
Why are we wasting our time instead of marching upon the un- 
defended city of Nuceria, barely ten miles away ? Rouse up your 
courage, and depend upon it that, if you are prepared to resist 
the commands of your general, I shall be ready to put myself at 
your head and to take upon myself the responsibility of leading 
you in this terrible crisis. Once this would have been difficult. 
Now nothing prevents you obtaining your rights once for all." 

53. The general made answer as follows (Orat. Ob/.): — "The 
enemy that you have been so long seeking is now only two miles 
distant : prepare then to conquer ot to die. I will send spies to 
bring me word of their numbers and the position of their camp ; 
this done, I must entrust the rest to you. Remember that your 
country depends upon y.ou. If you conquer, you will enjoy 
ease, plenty, freedom, and glory ; if you are defeated, you will 



168 GRADUATED EXERCISES. 

experience the only treatment you will deserve, that of slaves: np 
then and quit yourselves like men. Ten days ago you were 
eagerly longing for a battle: do you now shrink back? Ask 
yourselves whether you prefer a glorious death or an in- 
glorious flight." At these words the soldiers were filled with 
fury ; they cast aside fear, they forgot their complaints, and pro- 
mised one another to conquer or to die : and there was not one 
who thought victory for a moment doubtful. Soon afterwards 
all retired to their several tents, and there, by the command of the 
general, rested themselves till night brought darkness and the 
conflict. The general then ordered all the bravest centurions to 
appear before him, for the purpose of receiving their several 
instructions. 

54. After the general had cast round his eyes, and had examined 
each rank in turn, he turned to the place where all the bravest 
officers were assembled, and said {Orat. Red.): "Send some 
one at once to tell the king that I have examined the soldiers, 
and that no one here is guilty." After these words he turned 
towards the soldiers. He was ashamed of them, he said {Orat. 
Obi. ) ; he could scarcely believe them capable of such gross in- 
gratitude and cowardice. Why had they arms in their hands 
but to fight against the enemies of their country ? " Why," he 
added, "do we delay here, as though we did not purpose battle. 
Away with such shameful cowardice ! {Orat. Obi. still.) If you 
fight bravely, I promise you 16/. a-piece ; if not, you shall be 
decimated, and no Englishman will assert that I have acted with 
harshness towards you. Ten days ago you were all clamouring 
for battle ; why do you now decline it ? When in the city you 
cried for war ; now that you are in the camp do you cry for 
peace?" Although the general had not been at the head of his 
army more than three months, the soldiers had learned to respect 
him. He was only thirty-two years old, but in this great peril 
he displayed the sagacity of age with the courage of youth. 
Though therefore he addressed them with bitterness and with 
reproaches, they listened to him in silence, instead of threatening 
him as they had threatened their former commander. 

55. The inhabitants of this island were so bold that they 
would have preferred, a thousand deaths to disgrace if the choice 
had been necessary. One brave farmer was asked why he would 
sooner die nobly on the field of battle than live ignobly at home. 
He answered ( Orat. Red. ), " Because I am more afraid of shame 



GRADUATED EXERCISES. 169 

than of death." It happened once that they were invaded by 
the powerful nation of the Ventidii, who landed on their shores, 
marched up to their capital, devastated the country all round, and 
then laid siege to the city. The citizens determined to resist 
with boldness. Instead of throwing themselves at their enemies' 
feet, they sent away their families, their old men, and their 
treasures, and prepared to resist with desperation. Though they 
were prevented by scruples from committing suicide, they pro- 
mised one another to fight so desperately that the enemy should 
not take them alive. When they were all assembled in arms, 
their general addressed them thus (Oral. Red. and Obi.) : — " Re- 
member, citizens, that victory or death awaits you. I will say 
no more ; the enemy is at the gates : what reason is there for 
delaying ? " 

56. The despairing husbandmen, looking at the rising flood, 
exhorted one another to patience, and the eldest of them all, turning 
to his fearful companion? said (Oral. Reel, ), "Be of good cheer ! 
There are not less than 300 of us. Yesterday I sent a messenger 
to ask for help ; to-day I have sent another to report our penrous 
condition. I am persuaded that our houses, if destroyed, will 
easily be repaired, and we shall recover all the cattle that survive 
thf» deluge." Then, hearing a few of them murmur, he con- 
tinued thus (Oral. Cbl.) : — " We must do our best not to disgrace 
our reputation, for indeed we are in such a terrible position that 
we need all our faculties. What help is there except in industry 
and courage ? Nothing but God and our right hands can rescue 
us from destruction. I am now old, and very different from 
what I was when a boy ; but I will use all the strength I have 
in the task of assisting the wretched, and I am persuaded that 
there is not one of you that will not do the same. I hoped, indeed, 
that the waters would have diminished five days ago ; but, 
though you are disappointed, remember that you are English- 
men, and, whether the waters rise or fall, behave as English- 
men should. To work ! why do we wait longer ?" 

57. The citizens at first stood by in silence, and all the most 
respectable of them manifested, by the expression of their coun- 
tenance, the sorrow they felt. At last the eldest of their number, 
on hearing of the taking of the city, after asking her majesty to 
allow him to speak, stepped forward and addressed the queen 
a? follows (Oral. Obi.): — "Your majesty has asked us what 
cause wc have to complain, and has declared that as long as 



l 7 o GRADUA TED EXER CISES 

discontent prevails in our country prosperity will not increase. 
Suffer us, however, to remind you that your generals, without even 
hearing what we have to say in our defence, have razed four of 
our best towns, and are even now butchering 300 men a day. The 
meekest and mildest will turn upon an enemy that threatens 
their race with extinction; already there are rumours of re- 
bellion ; these rumours will soon increase, and rebellion will 
commence. We should have resisted this cruelty before now, 
if we had been able, and we are sure that if your majesty does not 
as soon as possible command these cruel generals to desist, you 
will soon not have One faithful subject in the country. Pardon 
our freedom. Is it not much better that we should say what we 
feel than that your Majesty's empire should be endangered ? " 

58. On hearing this, the brave but rash general replied in anger 
{Or at. Obi.) :— " Soldiers ! I am surprised at your cowardice; 
and I did not think that the men whom I have, been commanding 
for twenty years would have deserted me in this emergency. Is 
there any hope of success except in bravery? Did you not 
promise when you swore fidelity to me nine years ago, soon 
after the capture of the two camps near Naples, that you would 
always obey the slightest intimation of my wishes ? Away ! 
You are no longer worthy to be my soldiers, nor am I coward 
enough to be a fit general for you and the like of you." At 
these words, the most respectable of the soldiers were much 
grieved. After a short deliberation they sent the brave captain 
Tullius to the general, and he spoke briefly to this effect { Onit. 
Red. ) : that the whole army were determined to obey the general, 
with the exception of one or two mutineers, whom they would 
select and hand over to the general for execution. 

59. The brave soldier continued his narrative amid the attention 
of all present {Orat. Red.) : — " On leaving Naples the enemy 
proceeded with 600 of their bravest horsemen, and 10,000 
infantry, to Nola, a town that is at no very great distance from 
Naples, and is a convenient station for troops. Here they com- 
mitted all sorts of atrocities ; they slew some two and tortured 
others, arrested all the most wealthy citizens, burnt down the 
principal buildings, and destroyed the bridge ; finally they 
marched out, leaving the place a ruin. And if our forces had 
not arrived in time to save Pneneste, that town also would have 
suffered the same fate." (Orat. Obi.) " Indeed," continued the 
soldier with earnestness, " this is the most cruel war that I ever 



GRADUATED EXERCISES. 171 

heard of; the conquered are not spared on either side, and the 
bravest soldiers are hardened by war till they take pleasure in 
cruelty. You, my friends, are happy in never having expe- 
rienced the horrors of war ; do your best, then, to keep them at a 
distance from your shores, and do not grudge a few thousand 
pounds for this purpose. " 

60. (Orat. Red.) "With all his faults," said the kind-hearted 
soldier, weeping, " our general was brave, just, and merciful, and 
there was no one that did not trust him." Then, turning to his 
fellow-soldiers, who were assembled in great numbers to ask for 
their pay, he said {Orat. Obi.), " Cease from thus execrating 
the memory of the dead ; have you forgotten the many occasions 
on which our general led us to victory ? Can you not remember 
the many brilliant distinctions we gained under his command ? 
Did we ever prefer a reasonable request to him that he would not 
grant ? But this is just what you always do — you curse to-day the 
man whom you will bless to-morrow." This was what the brave 
captain Tullius said, and if the othei? soldiers had been like him, 
the rebellion would have been quelled, and the city of Naples, 
with all its fortifications and supplies, would not have been 
surrendered to the enemy in such haste. But, instead of listening 
to him, the infuriated soldiers selected the most turbulent of their 
number they could find, and, under their leadership, marched in 
haste to Rome. 

61. {Orat. Red.) "You will have no chance of attaining the 
truth," said the wise philosopher to the young and thoughtless 
Tullius, " unless you bestow more patience upon the investigation 
of truth ; " then, seeing the young man preparing to interrupt him 
without allowing him to finish his sentence, he said (Orat. Obi.), 
" Suffer me to finish what I am saying. Have you persuaded 
yourself that you are seriously studying, while you are merely 
taking up from time to time any subject that attracts your atten- 
tion and learning a smattering of it ? Did I not endeavour to 
persuade you to study some one science with thoroughness and 
steadiness ? And did I not propose to give you all the assistance 
I could, if you liked to study the history of your nation and your 
national literature? Without knowing something of the history 
of one's nation, it is impossible for a man to be a gentleman, 
much less a successful politician. And I will further beg 
you to consider the extent to which a desultory course of study 
and the acquisition of a smattering of many subjects tends to 



172 GRADUATED EXERCISES. 

make a man conceited, frivolous, and idle, if not positively 
immoral." 

62. The angry and sorrowful queen scarcely knew in this great 
calamity which alternative to prefer, whether it was better to 
give up her empire, or to run the risk of being killed. How- 
ever, with her usual firmness, she soon decided on the fit course 
to pursue. Sending for the sergeant of her body-guard, she 
informed him of all that had occurred, and requested him to send 
the ten strongest men that he had, armed and prepared for a 
journey to Rome {Orat. ObL), "Meanwhile," she said, "I 
shall remain here ; and though I am now an object of pity, the 
time will come when I shall be admired by my friends and 
dreaded by my foes, and there will be no one who will maintain 
that the queen of Rome did not behave with courage and with 
wisdom." After she had spoken thus, she left the palace with 
the intention of quitting the city. But so great was the fury of 
the crowd, consequent on the queen's refusal to appoint her suc- 
cessor, that frqm sunrise to sunset they beset the city gates, 
demanding a change of ministers and the execution of the unfor- 
tunate courtier whom the queen had chosen last for her principal 
adviser — a request which they well knew the queen would never 
grant, even though her refusal might cost her her own blood 
and that of all her most faithful soldiers. 



63. On finding that his friends were in this great misfortune, 
the wise and prudent philosopher turned to the rash young Tullius 
and advised him as follows (Orat. Obi.): — "If you had only 
listened to the advice I gave you ten years ago, you would not 
have been brought into this great peril, and you would not have 
been forced to seek safety by such disgraceful means. What has 
been done, however, cannot be undone. Why, therefore, do you 
delay longer here ? Did not your wise mother, when she sent 
money to you at Rome not very long ago, send a friend at the 
same time to inform you of the pleasure with which she had heard 
that your life was spared, and of her willingness to receive you 
home whenever you thought fit to return? Cease complaining 
then, and prepare to quit this place for Rome at a moment's 
notice." On hearing this, young Tullius, with his usual rashness, 
replied in haste ( Orat. Red. ), " I have no more to say; but I should 
like to inform you that your warnings, whether they are wise or 
unwise, have not the slightest effect upon me : and I shall judge 
for myself, without the interference of others, whether it is better 



GRADUATED EXERCISES. 173 

to go to Rome or to remain at Carthage. I never asked anyone 
to spare me or to pity me, and I ask no one now." 

64. When the general had heard this, he turned with fury to his 
brave officers, Tullius and Balbus, and said {Orat. ObL), " Why 
did you not tell me of this before I came here ? Now that it is 
too late to help our countrymen, you come with the sad news 
that almost the whole of our army is destroyed, that 1,400 of 
the infantry have been slain, that the cavalry have fled to their 
respective homes, and there is no hope left. What was there to 
prevent you from bridging over the river and marching upon 
Rome. If even a single regiment out of your vast army had 
done this, you would have penetrated without resistance into 
the heart of the enemy's country." Hearing this, the officers 
threw themselves at their general's feet with tears and supplica- 
tions, and said that they would never desert him, that nothing 
should induce them to break their faith with him, and that 
they would spare no one, and pity no one, who dared to accuse 
him of the slightest fault. All they wanted was, that he would 
give them a chance of redeeming their character and proving 
their penitence. 

65 . After the occupation of the bridge over the river, near 
the village of Alino, some seventeen miles from their camp, 
the little band of heroes did not enjoy a long respite from the 
attacks of the superior force by which they were now completely 
surrounded. Admirable was the spirit in which they prepared 
to resist the assault. Although they knew not where to look for 
succour, and could scarcely hope to succeed if unassisted, they 
felt that they could do their country good service, even if they 
only checked the invaders' progress for a few hours; and for such 
an object as this it seemed to these brave men worth while to 
risk their lives. In this dangerous position the general made his 
arrangements with coolness and sagacity. He sent out a few of 
the swiftest of his cavalry with orders to scour the country for ten 
miles round, and to bring back word the same day of the position 
and numbers of the enemy, and whether the attacking force con- 
sisted mostly of cavalry or infantry ; they were also, if possible, 
to take a prisoner or two, so as to enable them to gain informa- 
tion of the enemy's plans. The rest of the army was employed, 
without excepting even the officers, in fortifying all the weakest 
points of the position. After {postquam) all preparations 
had been completed, the aged general collected his men (and) 



174 GRADUATED EXERCISES. 

addressed them in his usual cheerful way (Orat. Obi.): — " I have 
done," he said, "what I could : the rest depends on you ; and I 
am sure you will not, as the enemy have repeatedly done, promise 
without performing. I now dismiss you to your several posts, in 
perfect confidence that you will not live to be pitied, and that 
none of you will prefer disgrace to death. " 

66. " The flower that blooms to-day to-morrow dies," says the 
melodious poet Shelley in one of his sweetest poems ; and in truth, 
poets, moralists, novelists, and philosophers repeat, almost 
without ceasing, meditations on the transitory nature of every 
thing in the world, and are never tired of asserting that life is 
nothing but a dream. It is curious, however, to note the little 
success that these remarks, in their usual exaggerated form, have 
had in influencing the actions of practical men. The instinct of 
the majority of mankind refuses to believe those who would 
maintain that life is a dream, heroism a delusion, and that there is 
nothing worth living for. On the contrary, men have felt that 
there is no position in life but can be made real and noble by 
acts of self-sacrifice, whether for the benefit of one's country or 
for that of individuals. I am therefore inclined to prefer to the 
usual exaggerations of philosophers, the following simple advice 
which I once heard a father give to his son [Orat. Obi.) : — "Do 
not forget the importance that attaches to every action of life. It 
matters not whether it be great or small ; for whether great or 
small, it can <■ be rightly or wrongly done. That was what the 
Stoics meant when they said that, even if a bad man merely ex- 
tended his finger, he sinned ; by which they meant that the most 
trifling action of a bad man must be bad." 

67. Ten years after the reduction of this vast kingdom,, the 
Casmathians, led by the intrepid Balbus, made a daring inroad 
beyond the river Eborius and advanced to Tuiium, a town some 
thirty miles off, with no more than 500 horse. By order of 
Tullius, the king of Turium, the bridge had been broken down 
to cut off the retreat of Balbus, and the person or head of the 
rebel was every moment expected. The king's legate, from a 
motive of fear or pity, having sent a messenger to apprise 
Balbus of his danger, recommended him to escape with speed. 
"Although," replied the intrepid Casmathian to the messenger, 
" your master is at the head of 30,000 men, yet, since he wishes 
to know what sort of men crossed the Eborius with me, I will 
shew him that he has not, in all that host, three such men as 



GRADUATED EXERCISES. 175 

these. " Then turning to three of his followers, he ordered the 
first to plunge a dagger into his heart, the second to leap into 
the Eborius, and the third to cast himself down a precipice. 
All of them obeyed without uttering a word of remonstrance. 
" Relate what you have seen,''" continued Balbus. " Before 
evening it will be your general, not I, that will need pity. Why 
do you loiter ? Depart, unless you wish to perish ; and tell him 
that twelve hours hence he will be chained among my dogs." 
Before the evening the camp was surprised, and the threat 
executed. 

68. The haughty Solyman, Emperor of Turkey, in his attack 
on Hungary, took the city of Belgrade, which was considered 
with justice the bulwark of Christendom. After this important 
conquest, a woman of low rank approached him and complained 
wtih bitterness that some of his soldiers had carried off her cattle 
one night while she was asleep, and had thus deprived her of her 
only means of subsistence. "Tell me," said Solyman, with a 
smile, "how you contrived to sleep so soundly that the robbers 
did not wake you. I could not have slept so soundly." "True, 
my sovereign," replied the woman, "I did sleep soundly, but it 
was in the fullest confidence that your highness watched for the 
safey of your poorest subjects." 

The magnanimous emperor, instead of resenting this freedom, 
praised the courage with which she had spoken, and made the 
poor woman ample amends for the loss she had sustained. 



L AT IN GENDERS. 



First Declension. 
Feminine. 

Second Declension. 
Masculine Endings, er, ir, and us. Neuter Ending, um 

(alvus, colus (m), domus, humus, vannus ; 
Exceptions; Greek nouns in odus, as exodus, &c, with dialectus, diphthongus, &o 

(.PELAGUS, VIRUS, VULGUS (m). 









Third Declension. 






Masculine Endings. 




Feminine 


Endings. 




Neuter Ending*, 


er, or, os 






do, go, io, as, is 


i, aus, X 




C, A, T, E, L, N f 


66, imparisyllabic 




es, parisyllabic ; 


S, impure 


ar, ur, us short, 


o, when not do, go, io 




US. longy in hypermonosyllables 


US long, in mono- 








Principal Exceptions. 


syllables 


Principal Exceptions. 


do cardo ordo 


udo 




Principal Exceptns. 


er Cadaver 


ITER 


go 


harpago ligo 


marg 
, as papil] 


3 


1 sal sol 


PAPAVER 


TUBER 


io 


nouns not abstract 


o, &c ; 




UBER 


VER 




also ternio, &c. 






n lien pecten 


VERBER 


linter 


as 


as elephas vas 
vas (vasis) 


{vadis) 

FAS 


NEFAS 


ren splen 


or arbor 


jGQUOR 


is 


amnis anguis (f) 


axis^ 


cassis (is) 


wrfur furfur 


COR 


MARMOR 




cinis collis 
fascis finis (f) 


crinis 
follis 


ensis 
funis 


turtur vultur 


oveoa 


dos 




ignis lapis 


mensis 


orbis 


us shorty lepus 


CHAOS 


EPOS 




panis piscis 


postis 


pulvis 


pecus (udis) 


os (oris) 


os (ossis) 




sanguis torris 
vermis 


unguis 


vectis 


us long, grtIS (m) 
SUS (m) mus 


es coinpes 


merces 


X 


calix codex 


cortex 


frutex 


merges 


quies 




grex pollex 


silex 


thorax 




requies 


seges 




vertex 








teges 


iES 


es 


acinaces 










s 


bidens(f) dens 


fons 


hydrops 




c caro 


echo 




mons pons 


rudens (f) 





Fourth Declension. 
Masculine, except acus, idus (pD., manus, portions, tribns. 

Fifth Declension. 
Feminine, except dies (f. Poets.), meridies. 

A. Masculine by meaning. Names of Male persons, the Occupations of men, and 

Winds, Rivers, and Months. 



B. Feminine 



of Females, Countries, Islands, Towns, 
Plants, and Trees. 



Masculine Exceptions to B Neuter. 



Towns. Some in o, as, Croto, Hippo, &c 
All Plurals in i, as Veii, Delphi, &c 
Plants Those in er (and many in us) of 
the secondm 



Towns. All in um, or plural a. 

Those in e or ur of the third. 
Plants. Those in sx o* ur if t!u third 



SCHEME OF LATIN PRONUNCIATION.* 

Based on the nearest English Approximations, 

VOWELS AND DIPHTHONGS. 



Latin 


a 






if 


a 


ft 


e 


*> 


ae 


>> 


oe 


»» 


e 


9> 


i 




t 


»» 




»» 


o 






»» 


o 


»» 


u 






»» 


u 


»> 


au 



English 




in father. 


>> 


/rrf 


a in «way, orainvilLz, 


>> 




ai in p#m. 


>t 




a/ in pain. 


»j 




<w" in p^m. 


»» 




<? in m^n. 


>» 




* in machme. 


»? 




* in p/ty. 


>» 




o in h^me. 


»> 




o in top. 


»> 
>> 




« in rwle. 
« in fall. 



= ,, aw in power. 

(Latin € followed quickly by Latin 
"ft (differs little from present 
pronunciation). 
4»; _ /Latin e followed quickly by Latin 

" " \ i (differs little from «* in p«*n). 





CONSONANTS. 




Latin c, ch 


= 


English 


k. 


M g 


= 


i» 


g'mget 


M S 


= 


»> 


s in jin. 


„ t (ratio) 


= 


i ■ 


/ in ca/, not jA, as 
in na/ion. 


,, J 


= 


f> 


^ in ^yard. 


„ z, ph, th 


s 


f » 


v. 

2, /^, M. 


bs, bt should be sounded and generally written /*,//. 
Latin S between two vowels = (sometimes) English s in rose, e.g. * roSa, 



* Taken from the Syllabus of Latin Pronunciation, issued by the Pro- 
fessors of Latin at the Universities of Cambridge and Oxford, at the request 
of the Head Masters of Schools Some modifications have been made by 
the suppression of all Italian standards, and of all the English standards of 
pronunciation that contain a vowel followed by r. Consequently the Latin 
O is represented by the English o. The Professors give the option of pro- 
nouncing v as v or as w. 

N 



178 



APPENDIX. 



APPENDIX 

ON THE CONNECTION OF SENTENCES. 



You may know the Latin equivalents of every word and idiom in the 
English language, and yet may be unable to write Latin Prose. For to 
write Prose you must also know how to connect together the different parts 
of a Latin sentence, and the different sentences of a Latin passage. For this 
purpose the following rules may be useful. They rise naturally out of the 
colloquial nature of English as contrasted with the logical nature of Latin : 

I. English prefers co-ordinate, Latin subordinate clauses. 

IL English prefers multiplicity of subjects, Latin one subject. 

III. English omits connecting particles, Latin inserts them. 

IV. English uses epithets, Latin uses subordinate clauses. 

I. He took and burned the bridge Pontem captum incendit 

II. Tkey asked him his opinion, Rogatus (or interroganti- 
and he replied, <&*c. bus) sententiam respondit 

III. When you have a groupof abrupt English sentences connected perhaps 
by no Conjunctions at all, or by and (which may mean anything) — e.g. 
(i) ' The king refused tlte petition ; (2) The queen was delighted*— you must 
ask, first, which is the most important sentence in the group? secondly, what 
is the relation between this, the most important sentence, and others that are 
less important ? The most important sentence must be as it were the spine, 
of the sentence, and the less important must be the vertebrae, and must be 
carefully connected with the spine. A Latin period is vertebrate. 

But how are we to connect each of the vertebrae with the spine? What is 
to be our connecting particle in each case? The English will not help us 
much here : for the connecting particles in English are like the vowel points 
in Hebrew — they are not written, but must be deduced from the context, and 
must be expressed by the voice. For example, above, the relation of sen- 
tence (2) to sentence (1) is that of (a) consequence to cause, and this may be ex- 

— > 
pressed in two ways, either by a forward link : * Quod quum rex nega- 
visset se facturum, regina prae gaudio exultabat,' or by a backward link, 

' Quod or quae res reginam stimmo gaudio affecit' or, • Regina igitur,' or, 

' Itaque regina.' But alter (2) above, and you must alter your connecting 
particle. 



APPENDIX. 179 

Thus, for ' the queen iva$ delighted* write 

r {b) was still patient' {contrariety). 

(c) had not bhown her usual tact ' [cause of the king's re- 
fusal). 
/ (d) left the room in anger' {immediate sequence). 
1 1 (e) insulted the petitioners' \simultaneousness y or addition"). 
(J) saw that all was lost {consequence late but inevitable, 

turn vero, or, turn demtuu). 
(jr) had anticipated this' {precedence , jam antea). 

All these different sentences will require different forward or backzvard 
links : some of these are : — 

FORWARD LINKS: quum, quia, quoniam, qnamvis, ut 
(although), quanquam, ita (ut), tain- quam, antequam, prius- 
quara, donee, simul ac, dura, partim, non solum, quum 
(...turn), simul (...simul), aut (either), et {both), si, nisi, &c. 

The Participle is also used as a forward link, rogatus, rohen he was 
asked; and so are ut and qui in the phrases CUJUS erat Stultitise, 
ut erat semper stultus. 

BACKWARD LINKS: Nam, enim, quippe, itaque, igiturj 
idcirco, quocirca, quamobrem, quare, autem, vero, 
verum, sed, at, quanquam {and yet), jam, interim, interea, 
confestim, mox, deinde, postremo, denique, turn demum, 
porro, prseierea, hue accedebat Ut. Above all, the Relative Pro- 
noun is thus used, e.g. ' quse quum ita sint,' ' quibus auditis,' ' quod 
quum intellexisset,' and 'quod si,' which last is almost equivalent to our 
'and if' It will be a useful exercise to classify these links or conjunctions 
according to their meaning. 

Sometimes a backward link is rendered unnecessary by an emphatic word 
at the beginning of the sentence, referring to the previoa sentence, e.g. 
' Nee vero ulla vis imperii tanta est ut premente metu possit esse diuturna.. 
Testis est Phalaris, &c.' So especially idem for 'he also.' See Par. 46. 

IV. Under the head of Omission of Connecting Particles comes the English 
use of implied statement or imittendo ; e.g. ' The haughty monarch refused to 
listen to the remonstrances of his ministers.' Here the epithet ' haughty 
implies the reason why the monarch did not listen. The conversational 
English, disliking subordinate sentences, prefers to imply the reason in an 
epithet : the logical Latin prefers to express it : * CUJus erat semper super- 
buc,' 'ut erat natuia superbus.' 



ALPHABETICAL INDEX. 



The references {unless the page is specially mentioned) are to the 
Paragraphs. 



Par. 

A 22 

Ablative, meaning of . . . 28* 
„ in i and e. Page 1x5* 

„ when used . . 28-32 

„ after Deponents ^ . 13 

Abstract Nouns not frequent in 

Latin yi 

Accusative, before and after 

Infinitive, ambiguous ... 48 
Adjectives, not doubled . . 12 
Adverbs, Adverbial Phrases 24, 25 

After, Conjunction 11 

Alius . . . i 7 

All, ' all that, &c.' .... 54 
Also, in 'he also* = idem . . 46 

Alter 7 

And he = qui ...... 46 

A nd omitted 47 

And 'and no one, nothing, &c* 45 

Another 7 

Antequam, when followed 
by Subjunctive ..... 66 

Any 7 

Apodosis, meaning of ... . 69* 

As . . . as 59 

As long as 11 

Ash.' I ask to* .... Page 89 

At, ' at enim ' 44a 

Attribute, the 18 

Autem, different from sed . 44^ 

Auxiliary Verbs 12 

Because, 'not because . . . but 

because* 68 

Before, Conjunction .... 11 

But omitted 47 

But, when sed, when autem. 44a: 
But, 'there's no one but' . . 55 
CelO j construction of .... 14 
Come, ' I come to see ' ^ . . . 72 
Command, ' I command him 

to ' . . , . . Page 89 

Command in oratio obliqua . . 78^ 
Comparative of Adjectives 

in -eus, «ius, -UUS Page 21 1 
Comparison, expressed by quam 6x 
Comparison, expressed by the 

Ablative 62 

Conditional Sentences .... 69 

Conjunctions ...... 43-7* 

t) Coordinate ... 44 



Conjunctions, 

Subordinate. . . . . 
Conjunctions, of Condition 

,, of Puipose . 

,, of Reason . 

,, Negative . 

„ Enclitic 

,, Subordinate 
Connection of Sentences . 
Could 



Par. 
Coordinate and 

72 
67 
45 

44* 
. 48 

Page 164 



Page 10 



Cum, me cum, <5^c. . Page 56 
Dative after Verbs and Ad- 
jectives 6, 13 

Dative after Verbs of Motion 15 
Dative of Design (Double Da- 
tive) 17 

Debui 13 

Dependent Interrogative . . 53 
Dignus followed by Abl. . . 32 

Domum 16 

Dum followed by Pres. Tense . ix 

Each 7 

Ellipse of Prepositions ... 42 
,, of Verb after Conjunc- 
tions 70 

Emptiness, expressed by Abl. . 31 

Enclitics 44a 

Epithet, implying cause . . Page 6 
Et omitted . . ... 44 

Et non, to be avoided ... 45 

Ex, ' ex itinere ' 39 

27 
22 
49 
49 
9i 
90 
27 
30 



Extension, expressed by Ace. 

Every 

Fear, I (construction) .... 

Fertur 

First, ' he was the first to ' Page 

Fit, ' he is not fit to &c.' „ 

For, 'for ten minutes ' . . . 

Fulness, expressed by Abl. . . 

Future Participle, how ex- 
pressed in Inceptives. . Page 98 

Genitive after accuso, ab- 
solvo 36 

Genitive after Impers. Verbs 13a 
„ y , Participial Adj. 34 

„ „ other Adj. . . 35 

,, of Quality ... 37 

„ Objective . . . . 33 

, , after Adj ectives and 

Participles . . 34 5 



INDEX, 



X8i 



Par. 
Genitive after Verbs of Ac- 
cusing, &c. . . 3 6 
Gerund, after what Preposi- 
tions 75 

Gerundive • 75 

M used impersonally 5 
Gmi*, « this ^rt* calamity ' 19 

Having,' having s>*\&' ■ (end) 66 
/f / w = ^ Aw« *3 

///« = se ..... iort, 78/ 

Hope, * I hope to, Ma/' . Page 88 

Idem, = he also 4 6 

If, *if he comes' " 

M ■ he asked if 5 1 

,. 'z/so/'z/not' 70 

Igitur, where placed . . . 44* 
Impei scnai Verbs . . . 13* 

/«, • in anger ' 24 

Indignus, followed by Abl. . 32 

Infinitive Future . Page 98 

„ and ACC ambig. - 4 s 

Instead of Page 95 

Interest *3« 

Interrogative, Dependent . . 53 
„ in 1 >rat. Obliqua fid 

Islands, case of, after verbs 

of motion 16 

//, • it was John that &c. # . . 4 

,, redundant 5 

„ 4 it is said that ' 5 

Ita followed by Si . . Page 85 

,, meaning of 71 

Jam, different from nunc . . 25 
JubeO, Construction of rage 89 
if'fe/aman //feCato' ... 60 

Locative Case 1 

Magis, different from pins . 25 

Magni 29 

Mea interest 13* 

Measure of excess 42 

Metaphors 79 

Minoris ....... 29 

ModO = only . . . . . 25 

More, ' more than a hundred ' . 63 

,, when magiS, when plus 25 
Motion, Verbs implying ... 15 

,. Verbs of IO 

MultO with Comparative . . 42 

Must 12 

Ne in Prohibition 12 

Neforut. . ,non ... 72 

Wemine, avoid 10 

Neminis, avoid 10 

Nemo = no 22 

ISfeque, not et non . . 45 

Neuter, used Adverbially . .4 



Par. 

No, ' no poet ' . . . . . aa 

Nostri, Genitive, when used. 10 
Nostrum, Genitive, when 

used 10 

Not, ' not because " 68 

Now, jam, nunc 25 

,, Conj. turned by Rei. . . 46 

Nullius, not nerninis . . 10 

Nullo, not nemine ... 10 

Nunc, different from jam . 25 

Object, Indirect 14 

Objective Genitive ... 33 

Of after Participles 34 

0f= made of 37 

,. redundant 40 

One 8, 9 

Once, when seme!, when 

forte, when quondam . 25 

Only . . . . ' 25 

Oratio Obliqua .... 78a 

Recta 78 

Other, ■ the other ' 7 

Ought Page 10 

Parentheses 77 

Parti ciple Present (English) 23, 74 

Parvi 29 

Passive English rendered im- 
personally 6 

Passive English ambiguous . ix 

PaullO with Comparatives . . 42 
Personifications, not so frequent 

in Latin as in English ... 79 

Persjutded, I am 6 

Pluris 29 

Pius, different from magiS . 25 

Point of time 28 

Postquam n, 66 

Potui . 12 

Prepositions, Alphabetical Dic- 
tionary of . . .... 41 

Prepositions, between two 

Nouns 33 

Prepositions, Ellipse of ... 42 

., local meanings of 26 
Prepositions implying Rest or 

Motion 39 

Prepositions, Verbs com- 
pounded with 15 

Prepositional phrases . . . . 20 

Price . . 29 

Prius-quam, when followed 

by Subjunctive 66 

Prohibition 12 

Promise, * I promise to ' . Page 88 

Pronouns 7-10 

,, how avoided . ... 76 



182 



INDEX. 



Par. 
Protasis, meaning of ... . 69* 
Provided that .... Page 83 

Quam 61 

Quamvis Page 84 

Qaanquim .... ,.84 

Quanti 29 

Question, Dependent . . . . 53 
,, in Oratio Obliqua . 78^ 

Q^i 52 

Quiclam — a 22 

Quidem to be separated from 

ne 45 

Quidquid hcxninum . . 20 
Quilibet, quivis, when used 7 
Quin followed by futnrum 

sit 49 

Quisquam, nee quisquam 45 
,, when used 7, Page 1 i3t 

Qui s que .. 7 

,, used after a Super- 
lative Adjective 22 

Quivis 7 

Quum . 66 

Refert 13^ 

Reflexive Verbs . ... 13** 

Relative Pronoun .... 52-59 

,, ,, omitted . . 58 

Relative precedes Antecedent 54 

Relatival Conjunctions . . . 59 

Rus 16 

Se, distinguished from ilium, toa 
Sed ,, ,, autem 44^ 

Sequence of Tenses . . 64 

Should 12 

Si 69 

Sive and utrum . . . Page 85 
Solum — 'only' ..... 25 
Subjunctive, after Relative 

Pronoun 52 

Subjunctive, when used 

afier Conjunctions of Time . 66 
Sum, with Double Dative . .17 
Supine, • venio visum ' . . 75 

Supposing Page 83 

Suus, ipsiuS . . . Page 102 

Tanti 29 

Tan turn -= ' only ' .... 25 

Tenses . 11 

Tenses, sequence of ... 64 

Than 61-63 

Tltat, Conjunction ... 48, 49 
„ 'that . . . not* — ne . 72 
, , ' there's no doubt that ' . 49 
„ ' I fear that .... 40 
,, ' it is said tha £ ' ... 49 
,, 'it seems that' ... 49 
That* Pronoun 5 



Par 

That, distinguished from who . 52 
„ ' the most beautiful that* 54 
„ after repeatedAntecedent 56 

„ for when 57 

,, 'that . . . «0*'=quin 55 

The., uses of 21 

The y * the battle of Cannae ' . 20 

„ ' the men in the ship . . 20 

„ ' the river Tiber ' ... 18 

,. ' the timid dove ' . ... 18 

This, ' this great calamity ' . . 19 

Though Page 84 

Till, Conjunction 11 

Time, extension of 27 

Time, point of 28 

To, different meanings of . . 73 

Too, 'too— to' Page 90 

Towns, after Verbs of Motion 16 
Turn demum .... Page 85 

Ullus 7 

Unless .... Par. 11, Page 85 

7 

72 



Uterque . 

Utinam 

Utrum, used in Dependent 

Interrogatives .... 51 

Verbal, after Prepositions . . 75 

,, English use of . . .75 

Verbs, Auxiliary 12 

„ followed by to . . . . 73 
„ „ that ... 49 

Verbs, compounded with Pre- 
positions .... 15 
,, fokowed by the Abl. . 13 
„ „ two Ace. 14 

„ ,, Dat. 6 13, 15 

it n Genitive 13 

„ Ut Page 89 

,. Impersonal. . . . 13^ 
Vereor (construction) ... 49 
Vero different from verum . 44 
Verum different from vero . 44 
Vestri, Genit:ve, when used . 10 
Vestrum,Genitive,whenused 7 

Videtur 49 

What, double use of .... 53 
When, ' when he comes ' ... 13 
Whether, when utrum, when 

sive 51 

While, followed by Eng. Past, 

Lat. Pres 11 

While, (logical) omitted . . . 47 
„ not temporal .... 87 
,, ' ivhile walking ... 70 
Who, different from that ... 52 
With, ' with an^er ' . . .24 

Without. With Verbal . Page 9* 
Would . . ...... is 



' 





mmm 



:"■**& 



■H. 



■ 




